CE30300E

SUMMARY OF CONTENTSSOPHO iS3010/iS3030 (SSW300) Customer Engineer Manual (9710)

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-1CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3AMENDMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-13

1. SOPHO iS3010/3030CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. SERVICE CONDITIONS . . . . . . 2-13. MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14. LOADING AND RETRIEVING

ISPBX SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . 4-15. PROJECT DATA PROTECTION 5-16. THE HANDLING OF PRINTED

WIRING BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

7. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . 7-18. MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME . 8-19. FINISHING INSTALLATION . . . 9-110. DIL SWITCHES AND STRAP

SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

11. CONNECTION OF AUXILIARYEQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

12. DIAGNOSTIC TEST . . . . . . . 12-113. CLEARANCE OF FAULTS . . 13-114. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 14-115. POWER SUPPLY

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

A. FRONT CONNECTORASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

B. S0 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

DIAGRAMS

ALARM CODES

9710 DB-A 9150e-35 1© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1997. All rights are reserved.

Reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of the copyright owner.

ALARM CODES

ALARM CODE ERROR TYPE

1000

1002

1003

1005

1006 10 20 30 40

1008 40 41 42 50 51 60 70 71 80(1) 80(2) 90

1009 80

1010 10 15 30 35 40 50 51 60 61 70 80 90

1011 30 35 40 50 51 60 61 70 80 90

1013 10

1014 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1015

1023

1030

1040 10 20 30 31 40 50 51

1041 20 21 30 40

1042 10 20 30 40 50 60 61 70 80 90

1043 10 20 30 40 50 60

1044 10

1045 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1046 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1048 00 01 02 03 05 06 07 08 09

1049

1050

1051

1052

1060

1065

1066 00 10 20 30 80 90 95

1080

1081 00

PREFACE

This manual is valid for installing and maintaining the SOPHO iS3010/3030 with SystemSoftware 300.

It is also valid for SOPHO-S55/255 systems. References made in this manual to theSOPHO iS3010/3030 are also valid for the SOPHO-S55/255.

9710 DB-A 9150e-35 0-1© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1997. All rights are reserved.


0-2 DB-A 9150e-35 9710© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1997. All rights are reserved.


CONTENTS

0. CONTENTS Pages 0-1/0-14 (9710)

1. SOPHO iS3010/3030 CHARACTERISTICS Pages 1-1/1-12 (9412)

1.1. SYSTEM ASSURANCE TEST SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2. PROJECT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.3. RETRIEVING THE RUNNING POM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.4. DATA PACKAGE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.5. POWER FAIL PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.6. SYSTEM STARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.7. COLD / WARMSTART CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.8. TELEPHONE SETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.9. TRUNK UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.10. EXTERNAL CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.11. TONE GENERATION AND RHYTHMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.12. OPERATOR POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.13. DAY SERVICE - NIGHT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.14. ALARM SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.15. ALARM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.16. POWER SUPPLY FOR SOPHO iS3010/3030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

2. SERVICE CONDITIONS Pages 2-1/2-4 (9412)

2.1. CIRCUIT CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2. CHANGING CIRCUIT CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.3. OWNERSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.4. POSSIBLE SERVICE CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.5. PERIPHERAL MODULE SERVICE CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4



3. MAINTENANCE Pages 3-1/3-6 (9412)

3.1. CONTROL SECTION TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2. SWITCHING SECTION AND PERIPHERAL SECTION TESTING . . . . 3-13.2.1. Automatic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.2.2. Manual Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.3. SWITCHING SECTION AND PM TEST ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.4. MONITORING ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.5. ALARM GENERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.5.1. History Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.5.2. Alarm Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

4. LOADING AND RETRIEVING ISPBX SOFTWAREPages 4-1/4-16 (9412)

4.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2. CONNECTING THE MPC TO THE CPU CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.3. INSTALLING FILES ON THE MPC HARD DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4. PREPARING SOFTWARE AND DATA FOR THE ISPBX . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.5. LOADING SOFTWARE AND DATA INTO THE ISPBX . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.5.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.5.2. Loading CPU Software (Flowchart) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.5.3. Loading CPU Software (MML Commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64.5.4. Loading POM Data and Peripheral Software (Flowchart) . . . . . . . . . 4-84.5.5. Loading POM Data (MML Commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.5.6. Loading Peripheral Software (MML Commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.5.7. Downloading Software for Peripheral Circuits DTX-I and DLC-U . . 4-11

4.6. RETRIEVING POM DATA FROM THE ISPBX (MAKING A BACK-UP) 4-134.6.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134.6.2. Making a Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144.6.3. Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

5. PROJECT DATA PROTECTION Pages 5-1/5-2 (9412)

6. THE HANDLING OF PRINTED WIRING BOARDSPages 6-1/6-2 (9412)



7. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Pages 7-1/7-10 (9412)

7.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2. SITE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.3. REQUIRED INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.4. ANTISTATIC HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.5. SITE CHECKS AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.6. UNPACKING, LOCATING AND FIXING THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.7. CABLING THE EMC IMPROVED CABINETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37.7.1. EMC in General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37.7.2. Cabinet Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37.7.3. Cabling the EMC Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47.7.4. Installing the Trunk Filters for ATU-SS02/ST02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57.7.5. Required EMC Improved Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7.8. PMC-PMC CABLE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

7.9. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE EMC AND NON-EMC CABINETS . . 7-77.9.1. Different Installation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77.9.2. Common Installation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

7.10. FLOORSTAND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

8. MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME Pages 8-1/8-6 (9511)

8.1. CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.2. MDF BLOCK ASSIGNMENTS AND JUMPERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.3. CABLE COLOUR CODE AND CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.4. FRONT CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.5. WIRING THE MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.6. LIGHTNING PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.7. MUSIC-ON-HOLD INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.8. MODEM LINE UNIT (MLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.9. DTU AND LTU CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.10. ASSEMBLING THE COAX CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5



9. FINISHING INSTALLATION Pages 9-1/9-16 (9412)

9.1. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.2. CPU - RS232C/V.24 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19.2.1. PR300.10 Interface Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29.2.2. PR300.20 Interface Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.3. V.24 INTERFACE CARD (VIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9.4. REMOTE INTERFACES HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

9.5. IPH-A AND IPH-B INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

9.6. INSERTING AND REMOVING ICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

9.7. STRAPPING OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9.8. ALARM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89.8.1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89.8.2. External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109.8.3. DIL Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129.8.4. CANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-139.8.5. V.24 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-139.8.6. Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-149.8.7. Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9.9. START-UP AND JOB COMPLETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

10. DIL SWITCHES AND STRAP SETTINGS Pages 10-1/10-60 (9710)

10.1. ANALOGUE LINE CIRCUIT-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.2. ANALOGUE TRUNK UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-310.2.1. ATU-EM (2 Wire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-310.2.2. ATU-EM (4 Wire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-610.2.3. ATU-CH02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-910.2.4. ATU-ST26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1010.2.5. ATU-AS36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1210.2.6. ATU-IL01/IL03/IL04/IL13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1410.2.7. ATU-IL23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1510.2.8. ATU-LB12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1710.2.9. ATU-PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1810.2.10. ATU-ST03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2110.2.11. ATU-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

10.3. DIGITAL TRUNK UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2810.3.1. DTU-CA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2810.3.2. DTU-PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2910.3.3. DTU-PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30



10.3.4. DTU-PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3310.3.5. DTU-BA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3610.3.6. DTX-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

10.4. LINE TERMINATING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

10.5. KEY TELEPHONE LINE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4310.5.1. KTLC01/02/03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4310.5.2. KTLC-A/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

10.6. METERING CIRCUIT AND SWITCH OVER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5010.6.1. MC(E)-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5010.6.2. MC(E)-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5010.6.3. MC(E)-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

10.7. MODEM LINE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5310.7.1. DIL Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5410.7.2. 2/4 Wire Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5610.7.3. Detection Levels (Answertone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

10.8. DIGITAL LINE CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5810.8.1. DLC-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

11. CONNECTION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Pages 11-1/11-12 (9412)

11.1. PREPARATION OF THE DLC FOR A SOPHO-SET OR LAM . . . . . . . 11-111.1.1. Manual Assignment of DLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-211.1.2. Malfunctioning of the DLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11.2. SOPHO SystemManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-311.2.1. SOPHO SystemManager Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-411.2.2. SOPHO SystemManager Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-611.2.3. PE and OM Procedures Related to the Management Functions

and SSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

11.3. INSTALLATION OF THE SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-811.3.1. Hardware Installation of the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 . . . . . . . . . . . 11-811.3.2. Projecting the SSV30 on a DOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-911.3.3. Projecting the SSV30 Connected to a DLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-911.3.4. The SSV30 Password Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.3.5. The Projecting of Download Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.3.5.1. Projecting Transmission Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.3.5.2. Steps for Changing the Default Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12



12. DIAGNOSTIC TEST Pages 12-1/12-10 (9412)

12.1. CHECKING EXTERNAL LINES WITH TEST TELEPHONE . . . . . . . . . 12-112.1.1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-112.1.2. Test Telephone Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

12.2. CHANGING OF TRAFFIC CLASSES WITH TEST TELEPHONE . . . . 12-3

12.3. SWITCHING OFF/ON OF MFC GUARD TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12.4. ANALOGUE OPERATOR POSITION SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12.5. TERMINATING THE OPERATOR POSITION SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . 12-9

13. CLEARANCE OF FAULTS Pages 13-1/13-84 (9707)

13.1. ACTIONS IN CASE OF TOTAL SYSTEM FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

13.2. ACTIONS IN CASE OF ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

13.3. USER COMPLAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7513.3.1. Extension Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7513.3.2. Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-79

13.4. ALARM CODES TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-82

14. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Pages 14-1/14-8 (9412)

14.1. COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.2. TESTING SPARES HOLDINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.3. TIME OF REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.4. RE-TEST AFTER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.5. WRITING OF REPAIR FORM (REPAIR CARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.6. UPDATING PROJECT RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

14.7. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-314.7.1. Replacement of PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-314.7.2. Replacement of AOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.7.3. Replacement of DOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.7.4. Replacement of the Alarm Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.7.5. Replacement of VPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.7.6. Replacement of CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-414.7.7. Replacement of the VIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-514.7.8. Replacement of Peripheral Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-514.7.9. Replacement of MC/MCE OR ESU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-614.7.10. Replacement of the PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6



14.7.11. Replacement of DLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-714.7.12. Replacement of the IPHs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-814.7.13. Replacement of LTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

15. POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION Pages 15-1/15-8 (9505)

15.1. EARTH AND POWER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

15.2. POWERING THE TWO CABINET SOPHO iS3030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

15.3. INSTALLING THE TRANSFORMER / RECTIFIER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . 15-315.3.1. Installing the 300 VA Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-315.3.2. Installing the 500 VA Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-415.3.3. Installing the 660 VA and 800 VA Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

15.4. POWER CONSUMPTION AND FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

15.5. EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6

A. FRONT CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY Pages A-1/A-4 (9412)

A.1. PREPARING THE 8X2 TWISTED CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.2. PREPARING THE MULTI COAX CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.3. USING THE PIERCE INSERTION TOOL (Wire insertion) . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.4. USING THE CLAMPING TOOL (Connector assembling) . . . . . . . . . . A-3

A.5. WHEN THE INSERTION TOOL GETS STUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3

A.6. RE-ADJUSTING THE INSERTION TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

B. S0 INTERFACE Pages B-1/B-14 (9412)

B.1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.2. P TERMINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.3. 1TR6 TERMINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.4. S0 BUS RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

B.5. CABLING S 0 BUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

B.6. CONNECTORS AND PIN NUMBERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

B.7. LINE POWERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

B.8. CONFIGURATION ASPECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12



Z. LOCAL INFORMATION (NOs) Pages Z-1/Z-2 (9412)

Diagrams 100 (Common Info)

100 PWB Front Connector Identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)110 Using the Antistatic Bracelet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)120 Colours of Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)121 Cable Stripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)122 Inserting and Removing of a Front Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)123 Flat Cable Connecting and Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4 (9412)130 Using Wiring Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4 (9209)131 Fixing Coax Connector to Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A4 (9412)140 Inserting an IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)141 Removing an IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)150 Assembling of Floorstand 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)152 Assembling of Floorstand 1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)155 Locating the Two Cabinet SOPHO iS3030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)160 Pierce F122 Connector Insertion Tool Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)161 Connecting the 8x2 Twisted Pair Cable to F122 Connector . . A5 (9209)162 Connecting the 8x2 Coax Cable to F122 Connector . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)165 Using the F122 Connector Assembly Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)

Diagrams 300-400 (Typical SOPHO iS3010/3030)

300 Removing the Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)310 Typical Shelf Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)315 Fastening of the PWB lock in the EMC Cabinets

for SOPHO iS3010/3030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)316 Cabling of the EMC Cabinets for SOPHO iS3010/3030 . . . . . . A5 (9412)317 SOPHO iS3010 EMC Cabinet without Rectifier Unit . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)318 Installing the Trunk Filters for ATU-SS02 and

ATU-ST02 (EMC Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)319 Installing the Mains Cable and the EBU in a NON-EMC Cabinet A5 (9209)320 Connecting and Mounting the EBU in an EMC Cabinet /

Mounting V.24 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)321 Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)323 300 VA Transformer Connecting Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)324 500 VA Transformer and Rectifier Unit Connecting Diagram (1) A5 (9412)325 660 VA and 800 VA Transformer and Rectifier Unit

Connecting Diagram (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)326 500 VA Transformer and Rectifier Unit Connecting Diagram (2) A5 (9412)



327 660 VA and 800 VA Transformer and Rectifier UnitConnecting Diagram (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9505)

330 Routing Cables and Earth Connection - SOPHO iS3010 (non-EMC cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)

331 Routing Cables and Earth Connection - SOPHO iS3030 (non-EMC cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)

335 Earth Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)340 Jumpering MDF - SOPHO iS3010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)341 Jumpering MDF - SOPHO iS3030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)350 Installing the PMC-PMC cable and the Mains Cable

in an EMC Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)351 Installing the PMC-PMC cable in a NON-EMC Cabinet . . . . . . A5 (9209)

Diagrams 400-500 (Cabling and MDF)

400 Line Circuit Connections at MDF Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9304)401 Analog Trunk Circuit Connections at MDF Blocks . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)402 MC / DTU / LDC Connections at MDF Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)403 MCE Connections at MDF Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)404 ESU Connections at MDF Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)405 PMC, ACC and KTLC Connections at MDF Blocks . . . . . . . . . A5 (9304)420.1 DLC / LDC / DTU / LTU Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)420.2 DTU-CA/PR/PU and LTU Interface Connections . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)420.3 DTU-PH and LTU Interface Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)421 ATU / MC Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)422 ATU / MCE Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)423 ATU-G ESU Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)424 ESU / ATU / ALC Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)425 IPH-A - IPH-B Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)430 MLU - MODEM - MDF Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)431 MLU - MODEM for MODEM Pool to MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)436 PSU-F (- ATU-LB) Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)440 Overvoltage Arrestor and Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)450 Coaxial Connector for MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9412)460 Operator Connection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A5 (9209)



AMENDMENTS

The manual update from 9412 to 9505 concerns the following items:

CHAPTER/SECTION DIAGRAM

DESCRIPTION

Chapter 0 Administrative changes.

Chapter 8 Section 8.7.: Music-on-Hold figure changed.

Chapter 10 Section 10.3.3.: DTU-PU strap/DIP switch description extended.

Chapter 13

Section 13.2.: Alarm code 1013 type 10 minor change.Alarm code 1040 type 50 text added.Alarm code 1042 type 10 text added.Alarm code 1048 text added.

Chapter 15 Figure 15.2.: Vertical key changed into 191.

Diagram 327 Wire colours added.



DESCRIPTION

Chapter 0 Administrative changes; amendments sheet.

Chapter 8 Section 8.7.: Music-on-Hold description and figure changed.



DESCRIPTION


Chapter 10 Table 10.2.2.b corrected.



DESCRIPTION


Chapter 10 Tables 10.2.11 and 10.2.12 corrected.

Chapter 13 Section 13.2.: Alarm codes 1043 and 1044 added.





DESCRIPTION


Chapter 10 Section 10.3.4.: DTU-PH info enhanced.



1. SOPHO iS3010/3030 CHARACTERISTICS

The SOPHO iS3010 and SOPHO iS3030 are Integrated Services Private BranchExchanges (ISPBXs). The maximum number of user ports for each exchange isrespectively:

• SOPHO iS3010This is a stand alone iS3010 cabinet with 96 user ports.

• SOPHO iS3030SOPHO iS3030 is available in two versions. These are the single cabinet system and thetwo cabinet system.

The single cabinet system contains 256 user ports with additional 32 dedicated user portsfor digital connections only.

The two cabinet system exists of one master and one slave cabinet. Master cabinetprovides 256 user ports with additional 32 dedicated user ports for digital connections only.Slave cabinet provides 256 user ports with additional 64 dedicated user ports for digitalconnections only. Maximum amount of ports is 512 + 96 dedicated ports for digitalconnections only.

The EMC charactersitics of the EMC improved cabinets for The Netherlands comply theEMC standards EN 55022 and EN 55101/1-6, class B. The EMC specifications of thecabinets for Germany are according to VDE 0839, VDE 0847, VDE 0876, VDE 0877, VDE0878, FTZ 12 TR 1/6.87, FTZ 12 TR 2/9.88.

In all systems three main functions can be distinguished. These functions are functionallygrouped into a:

- Control Section (housed within the CPU and PMC boards);- Switching Section (housed within the PMC board);- Peripheral Section (Peripheral Circuit boards).

The Control Section is divided over the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the PeripheralModule Controller (PMC) boards. The CPU contains the Central Processing part (controlledby a Motorola 68302 microprocessor). The Central Processor does the overall control of theISPBX.

The PMC (controlled by a Z80 microprocessor) contains the Peripheral Processing Unit(PPU). The Peripheral Processor does the real time low level control of the hardware in thePeripheral Modules (PMs). The PPU is controlled by the CPU on a higher level.



Other main functions housed within the PMC are:

- Switching Section;- Tone Sources;- Receivers and Senders of Tones for Keytone Dialling.

The communication between the CPU and PPU takes place via an Internal MessageProtocol (IMP) channel, via the backpanel.

To route telephone traffic from one extension to another the Switching Section is used. ThisSwitching Section consists of time-switch ICs located on the PMC board. These ICs providea non-blocking switching system throughout the ISPBX.

The Peripheral Module hardware may contain various Peripheral Circuits (PCTs) forconnection to analogue and digital telecommunication lines, including taxmetering circuitsfor call-accounting purposes. It may also contain Emergency Switchover Units to directlyconnect designated telephones to outside lines in the event of a system failure.

The two cabinet SOPHO iS3030 comprises one master and one slave cabinet. The CPU inthe master cabinet controlls both the PPUs in the master and slave cabinet.

The connection between the master and slave Switching Section is non blocking and it isaccomplished by connecting the two PMCs using two special PMC-PMC cables.

The shelves within SOPHO iS3030 may contain PCT boards with standard PM businterface, however some board positions in the lower shelves are dedicated for digital PCTsonly. Refer to the Hardware Configuration Manual for the configuration rules.

Each cabinet is provided with its own Power Supply Unit.

1.1. SYSTEM ASSURANCE TEST SOFTWARE

Most of the circuit boards in the ISPBX are tested in sequence under the control of asoftware program, known as System Assurance (SAS); this is called cyclic testing. Inaddition to this some circuit boards are able to signal faults themselves without being undercontrol of the System Assurance software. If a fault is detected by cyclic testing or if a faultis signalled by the circuit board itself then this fault will be reported to the SystemAssurance program and the details stored in a history buffer, which can be subsequentlyread out. A fault report contains a code identifying the type of fault, the hardware address ofthe faulty circuit, time of last detection, number of times the fault was detected, plusinformation to establish the reason for the fault. Depending on the type of fault an alarmmay be generated.

1-2 DB-A 9150e-35 9412© Philips Communication Systems B.V.1994. All rights are reserved.


Faults which occur in the ISPBX may be corrected in a number of ways:

- Roll-back : If a circuit was put in a not defined state by some transient eventthe System Assurance software takes the circuit out of serviceand then brings it back in. This may correct the fault.

- Isolation : If the fault is affecting the operation of system parts then thesoftware may take the faulty circuit out of service permanently,and put it in the ”autonomously blocked” condition.

- Accelerated testing : After a circuit has been put in the ”autonomously blocked”condition the software test cycle is accelerated to see if the faulthas disappeared.If the fault is not rediscovered, the circuitconcerned is automatically returned to service.

- Engineer action : A maintenance engineer may take a circuit out of service beforeremoving the appropriate circuit board for inspection andreplacement.

1.2. PROJECT DATA

A SOPHO ISPBX can be adapted to the customer's wishes. This customizing is done withhelp of procedures that define the project dependant data. There are two catagories ofproject data:

- Project Engineering (PE) data;- Operational Maintenance (OM) data.

Together these two types of project data form the so called POM database. This POMdatabase determines the way the system works.

During initial start-up procedure first the POM database should be loaded into the POMFlash EPROM database memory. Flash EPROMs are electrically programmable ROMswithout removing them from the board. To load the Run Time POM Database RAM memorywith the required POM database the coldstart procedure should be executed.

POM database should be loaded as one file into the POM Flash EPROM databasememory. POM database can be stored in the ISPBX at one time and executed at another. Itis possible to store in an operational ISPBX a second set of POM data, while theoperational Run Time database runs on a different set of POM data. The latest set of POMdata can be loaded in the Run Time POM database by performing a coldstart procedure.

Using a (Remote) Maintenance PC, within a running system a part of the PE data of thePOM database can be changed on-line. Effectuation of the changed PE data is doneafterwards by performing a so called warmstart.



The remaining part of the PE data of the POM database can only be changed off-line. Firstthe running POM database should be backed up into the POM Flash EPROM memory.Next the contents of the POM Flash EPROM memory should be transferred to the(Remote) Maintenance PC. Using a text editor, which produces straight ASCII files, thePOM database (PE and OM) can be changed. After changing, the POM database shouldbe stored in the POM Flash EPROM memory. Effectuation of the changed POM databaseis done afterwards by performing a so called coldstart. During the coldstart procedure thePOM database is copied into the Running POM database RAM.

PE data includes:

- Exchange properties (system and operator options etc.);- System time limits (extension, operator, night service etc.);- Number analysis (external numbers, operator access code etc.);- Tone and ringing rhythms (continuous, single burst etc.);- Alarm level definitions (major, minor alarm etc.);- Configuration data (extension types, trunk line types etc.);- Variable signalling data (on-hook recognition time, digit pulse lengths etc).

The ADF part (OM commands) of the running POM database can be changed on-line. OMdata can be loaded and updated at any time. It includes:

- Extension numbers;- Traffic classes, definitions and assignments;- Facility classes;- Abbreviated numbers;- Night service;- External numbering scheme;- Operator answering priorities;- Trunk group and line numbers;- Circuit conditions.

If required it is possible download an ADF file only. This ADF file can be executed using theOM command SUBMIT. This command should be used for loading an ADF file on-line intothe running POM database.

The commands to call up the procedures that load the OM-data into the POM database arecoming from one of the following items:

- A file called Administrative Data File (ADF), loaded with help of a Maintenance PC;- The Operator's Console, loaded in an interactive way;- A dedicated User Terminal, also loaded in an interactive way.



The contents of the ADF is prepared in accordance with a customer completedquestionaire. The ADF can be edited on a PC with any text editor program that producesstraight ASCII files.

1.3. RETRIEVING THE RUNNING POM DATA

SSW 300 offers the possibility to make a back-up of the complete running POM data base,using the (Remote) Maintenance PC.

In case the final running POM database might be lost, due to any reason, one should makealways a back-up of the running POM data base, using the Maintenance PC. Backup of thePOM database can be downloaded during initial start-up procedure.

Procedures to make a backup of the running POM data base are given in chapter 4 and theOM Commands Manual.

1.4. DATA PACKAGE STORAGE

The CPU and PPU data package memory parts contain also electrically programmableROMs called Flash EPROMs. Using the Local Maintenance PC the data package isdownloaded into the CPU and PPU Flash EPROM memory. If a package upgrade isrequired the new CPU and/or PPU software can be easily downloaded.

A CPU package can be downloaded at any time. A PPU package can only be downloadedif the CPU package already has been downloaded. If only the PPU package should beupgraded within a running system it can be done without downloading the CPU packagefirst, provided the present CPU package is correct. For detailed information refer to chapter4.

For SSW 300 and up the CPU and PPU software is supplied on 31/2 inch diskettes.

1.5. POWER FAIL PROTECTION

A battery charge part in the Power Supply Unit (PSU) is designed to convert 48 V to 4.6 Vto maintain a charge across an Emergency Battery Unit (EBU). The EBU ensures that thedata contained in the various RAMs (including Run Time Database RAM) is kept intact inthe event of a power supply interruption. It will keep the contents of the RAMs intact for atleast 96 hours if the primary power fails.



1.6. SYSTEM STARTS

There are three types of system starts: coldstart , warmstart and restart .

A coldstart is activated by the OM command COLDST. During the coldstart procedure thePOM database is copied from the Flash EPROM memory into the Running POM databaseRAM. As soon as loading starts, data relevant to the Peripheral Processor is copied into it'smemory.

A warmstart is activated in the event of a Peripheral Processor failure, a PeripheralProcessor to CPU communication failure, a PSU failure or too many restarts. Another wayof invoking a warmstart is by the associated OM command or switching off and on again thepower (EBU must be present).

A restart occurs when a watchdog circuit that guards the processes times out; it may affectone or two calls. A restart does not affect the Peripheral Processor, thus making it easy torecover from minor problems. If a second restart is needed within a short period of time, awarm start is carried out instead.

1.7. COLD / WARMSTART CHARACTERISTICS

A coldstart always generates an alarm. A warmstart only generates an alarm if a certainintegration level is reached. If the system includes Emergency Switchover Units (ESUs),designated telephones are directly connected to the public exchange lines under theseconditions, bypassing the system. Normally this situation continues for about 1 minute afterthe completion of a cold or warmstart. If the loopguarding process on the ESU detects aseized line, indicating a call on that line, the switch back to normal will be postponed untillthe call has been finished.

1.8. TELEPHONE SETS

Impulse, keytone and feature telephones can be connected to the system. Keytone typesare standard. If it is required to use impulse types, they need not to be specified in the PEdata. However, also when keytone telephone sets are used receivers of keytone (RKTs)should be specified in the project data. Providing that these measures have been taken,either telephone type can be connected; the system automatically distinguishes betweenthe two.

Not all telephones are fitted with enquiry buttons. The enquiry facility can, however, also berealised by a hook-flash, dialling '1' or, if fitted, by pressing a calibrated loop button; the PEdata must be set accordingly.



1.9. TRUNK UNITS

Various analogue and digital trunk circuits can be used. In PE data the type of signallingplan must be specified to adapt the trunk circuit to local requirements.

Trunk circuits can be assigned to trunk line groups. This must be specified in the OM data.Trunk lines are cyclically selected for outgoing calls; there is no fixed starting point.

The distant exchange determines the use of incoming trunk lines. The system always triesto accept a seized incoming line ; it treats in accordance with the PE data.

Trunk units can be equipped to directly connect designated telephones to the exchangelines in the event of a system failure. The telephones concerned must be compatible withthe (public) exchange (impulse or keytone dialling).

Trunk circuits can be connected to taxmetering circuits (MCs). Where this is the case theymust be specified in the PE data, otherwise the system will not recognize them.

1.10. EXTERNAL CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION

The clock for the time switches of the ISPBX is located on the PMC board in the mastercabinet. This clock can be synchronized with an external clock by connecting the clockreference output of the digital trunk termination board (DTU) to one of both clocksynchronisation input of the PMC-MC. Which clock synchronisation input is to be taken asthe synchronisation input is projectable. In case the projected clock input falls out, due toany reason, then automatically the other input is selected, if any. If there is not a secondsynchronisation clock available, then the internal system clock is selected.An alarm will be generated as soon as the clock circuit on the PMC-MC has been able tosynchronize with the external clock, or if synchronization is lost.

The synchronization of the PMC-MC with the external clock can continuously be watchedby OM procedure DICLKS (9002).

1.11. TONE GENERATION AND RHYTHMS

The PMC contains a 16K x 8 RAM to store 32 tones like dial tone, busy tone, ticker toneetc. These tones are used by the PCTs, each tone is made of 512 samples maximum.From these 32 tones by default 16 tones are dedicated for DTMF.The contents of the tone RAM is filled during start up and can be defined by projectengineering procedures. These procedures define the tone frequency, the tone level, andthe on/off rhythm of the tone.



1.12. OPERATOR POSITION

There are two types of Operator Positions:

- Analogue;- Digital.

The Operator Positions are connected to an optional daughter board on the PeripheralModule Controller board (PMC). These piggyback mounted daughter boards are called:

- Analogue Operator Card (AOC);- Digital Operator Card (DOC).

Two analogue operator positions can be connected to the AOC simultaneously, one digitaloperator position can be connected to the DOC. It is not possible to connect both AOC andDOC boards at the same time.

Each AOC connection includes the following:

- Power : 48 V D.C;- Speech : 4-wire speech circuit to connect a telephone handset;- Data : 2400 bits/s 4-wire data circuit for keyboard/display.

Two types of analogue Operator Position are available, these are:

- SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 20;- SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 50.

For using the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 20 refer to the Operator Manual, DB-A 9120. Forusing the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 50 refer to the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 50 User Guide.

The digital Operator Position is called the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 and uses a 2B+Dinterface, hence can either be connected to the DOC or to a Digital Line Circuit (DLC). If theSOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 is connected to the DOC, it can be powered by the DOC. If it isconnected to the DLC-C/D, it can be powered by an additional Line Driver Card (LDC) thatcan be connected in series with the DLC-C/D. If it is connected to the DLC-U no additionalLine Driver Card (LDC) is required, because DLC-U also provides line power for theSOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30. For using the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 refer to the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 User Guide.

Both types of Operator Position contain a self-test program to test its keyboard and itsdisplay indicators.



1.13. DAY SERVICE - NIGHT SERVICE

Day service is the system condition in which calls needing assistance are routed to theOperator Position(s). Night service is the system condition in which calls needingassistance are routed to a designated night service extension(s).

The Operator Position can be in one of the following conditions:

- "Present" and capable of providing call assistance.- "Present" but in the Administrative Mode (AM), whereby OM data can be displayed. This

mode can only be entered when the console is "present" or the operator is talking to oneparty only, with no other party on hold. If there is no speech connection, OM data canalso be changed.

- "Absent" but in the AM mode, where it is still possible to change and display OM data.- "Absent" and non-operational.

1.14. ALARM SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

Alarms are given in the form of visual and audible indications. The visual indications are given by means of major and minor alarm lamps on the analogueoperator switch board or on the external Alarm Unit. On the digital operator posts an alarmis shown in display as a triangle. On the Maintenance PC screen an active alarm isdisplayed in inverted video.

Visual alarms can only be reset by removing the cause of the alarm or resetting it with theappropriate OM command.The audible alarm indications are given by means of a buzzer on the following devices:

- Analogue operator position (SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 20 and 50);- Digital operator position (SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30);- Alarm unit.

An audible alarm on the operator position and on the alarm box, can be silenced with one ofthe buttons.

The OM command REROUT (6026) lets you suppress or allow the alarm signalling to theoperator.

The alarms System down, Major alarm and Minor alarm are also presented on the frontconnector FAA of the CPU (V.28 levels).



1.15. ALARM UNIT

The alarm unit is an external device carrying five LEDs with five relay contacts connectedparallel, two switches, a buzzer, a CANS relay contact and two alarm inputs. The alarm unitcan directly be connected to the CPU board, by means of a V.24 connection. The LEDs onthe alarm unit signal:

- Power on Alarm Unit available;- Major Alarm;- Minor Alarm;- System Down;- Emergency Bypass active.

The functions of the switches are to:

- Reset the buzzer on the alarm unit;- Activate the Emergency Bypass function.

In the alarm unit a connection to an external CANS relay can be made. Also two alarminputs can be monitored by the alarm unit. The status of these external alarms is sent tothe CPU. Such an alarm can result in a major or minor alarm, depending on the project datasettings in the POM database.

1.16. POWER SUPPLY FOR SOPHO iS3010/3030

The system can be supplied from the mains (110, 127, 220, 240 V AC at 48-62 Hz) or froman external 48 V DC supply, like a rectifier or a battery (positive ground!!). Because theexternal 48 V DC supply is not supported by the Philips Communication Systemsorganisation, the combination of the SOPHO iS3010/3030 and external power supply is nottested for EMC and safety specifications. The PABX is tested only with its build in AC mainssupply.

There is no way of changing the input voltage of the mains transformer, hence each mainsvoltage requires its own transformer.

Each system is fitted with a mains transformer and a Power Supply Unit (PSU). Thefollowing transformers are available:

- 300 VA for the SOPHO iS3010;- 500 VA for the SOPHO iS3010/3030;- 660 VA for the SOPHO iS3010/3030, one for each cabinet;- 800 VA for the SOPHO iS3030, one for each cabinet.



The PSU has it's own place in the exchange, and gets it's supply through the backpanel.Each mains transformer has it's own place in the mains transformer compartment, and isconnected to the backpanel. Depending on the total dissipation of the PSU a separaterectifier is placed in the transformer compartment, instead of in the PSU. The EmergencyBattery Unit (EBU) is connected with the backpanel in the rear side of the powercompartment unit, to two fastons marked 'plus' and 'minus'. Also Battery Supply may beconnected to the back panel instead of the mains transformer unit. The fast-on connectorsmarked with one hole (=negative voltage) and two holes (=positive voltage) then have to beused to connect the external 48 V DC box supply.

There are five -48Vdc outputs on the backpanel supplied by the PSU, protected by fiveelectrically recoverable fuses. LEDs are connected adjacent to each fuse in the PSU. If aLED is alight, the corresponding fuse is blown. At the bottom side of the PSU a so calledOK LED is mounted. When this LED is alight, all the internal PSU voltages (5V, 12V, 48V)are within their specified ranges.

Chapter 15. gives more detailed information about powering the SOPHO iS3010/3030.





2. SERVICE CONDITIONS

Three system services can "own" a PCT:

- Call Processing (CP) for telephony;- System Assurance (SAS) for testing;- Operational Maintenance (OM) for online maintenance.

The System Assurance service makes use of two types of ownership, called SAS1 andSAS2. Only one service can own a PCT at any one time. Ownership is granted on a prioritybasis. The priority levels from high to low are:

- OM;- SAS1;- CP;- SAS2;- NO.

If a service no longer requires the PCT it withdraws ownership, by handing it over to NoOwner (NO), thus making it available for one of the other services.

PCTs can be set to one of the following circuit conditions:

- INS : IN Service;- OUT : Out of Service;- ABL : Autonomously Blocked;- NIN : Not INstalled.

Ownership state and circuit conditions are described in the next sections. The combinationof ownership and circuit condition provides a PCT with its "service condition". All possibleservice conditions are given in section 2.4.

2.1. CIRCUIT CONDITIONS

• INSThe normal operational condition is INS. PCTs in this condition are available for callprocessing and are accessible for tests by SAS.

• OUTPCTs in circuit condition OUT are only available to OM. As long as at least one PCT is inthe OUT condition, the CIRCUIT BLOCKED indication is given on all Operator's Positionsin the condition "present"; the CIRCUIT BLOCKED alarm on the MPC is shown ininverted video.



The CIRCUIT BLOCKED indications are also active if the automatic system test isswitched off by means of an OM procedure, or if the emergency switch over function isactivated.

A PCT absent alarm is reset when a PCT is set to OUT.

• ABLThe Autonomously Blocked (ABL) condition is assigned to faulty PCTs by the systemassurance service to prevent them being seized for calls and possibly degrading systemservice.

• NINThe Not Installed (NIN) condition should be assigned to PCTs which do not physicallyexist in the exchange and also to PCTs not connected to lines, in an exchange with 32Analogue Trunk Unit (ATU) PCTs and only 30 external lines for example.

2.2. CHANGING CIRCUIT CONDITIONS

The following OM procedures are used to change and display the circuit conditions ofPCTs.

- SETINS / 7010 to change circuit condition to INS;- SETOUT / 7012 to change circuit condition to OUT;- SETNIN / 7014 to change circuit condition to NIN;- DISERV / 7030 to display service condition.

2.3. OWNERSHIP

• NONo Owner. If the PCT condition is in service (INS) and no owner retains the PCT, arequest for ownership from either CP, SAS or OM will always be granted. If the circuit isin the OUT, ABL or NIN condition, ownership can be granted to OM or SAS.

• OMIf the condition of a PCT is going to be modified by an OM procedure, OM will request theownership in order to prevent complex interactions with other services during thetransition of one circuit condition to another.

• SAS1SAS1 ownership is used during an accelerated version of the test loops which are carriedout on PCTs in the various circuit conditions.SAS1 ownership is also set when a PCT is unobtainable for some reason e.g. PCT board



removed or not activated, master PCT not activated or present, line blocked by distantexchange, terminal removed etc.

• SAS2SAS2 ownership is used during a test loop carried out on all PCTs in circuit condition INSin an operational system.Some SAS processes use the SAS2 owner during transitions.

• CPAs a telephony system is intended to perform telephony functions, Call Processing is themost frequent owner of a circuit.

2.4. POSSIBLE SERVICE CONDITIONS

The various possible service conditions are summarized in the following table:

Table 2.1. PCT Service Conditions.

CIRCUITCONDITION OWNER CODE MEANING

INS

NO 00 Normal operational condition (Idle).OM 04 Transitional condition during OM.

SAS1 03 - Condition when PCT has been blocked by distant exchange orSOPHO-SET or LAM not connected;

- Condition when PCT is physically absent;- Condition during manual SAS test;- Transitional condition (23->03->00);- Condition when PCT assists (without being test subject) in any SAS

owned test.CP 02 Normal operational condition (Call setup, Busy etc.).

SAS2 01 Condition during test owned by SAS2 or during transitional conditions.

OUTNO 10 PCT has been set to OUT.OM 14 Transitional condition during OM.

SAS1 13 Condition during test loop

ABL

NO 20 PCT has been autonomously blocked for operation due to malfunction.OM 24 Transitional condition during OM.

SAS1 23 Condition during test loop (accelerated automatic test on ABL PCTs).SAS2 21 Transitional condition (01->21->20).

NIN

NO 30 PCT not physically present or “surplus”; or may not be put into serviceafter a warmstart when other related hardware is not operational; or noDNR or route line number assigned.

SAS1 33 Condition during manual test loop.OM 34 Transitional condition during OM.



The Codes mentioned in table 2.1 have the following meaning:

- First-digit : 0 = INS1 = OUT2 = ABL3 = NIN

- Second-digit : 0 = NO1 = SAS22 = CP3 = SAS14 = OM

2.5. PERIPHERAL MODULE SERVICE CONDITIONS

The Peripheral Processor uses circuits and software to control the Peripheral Circuits(PCTs) in the shelves. These circuits and associated software form the control section ofthe Peripheral Module (PM). The control section can be in one of the service conditionswhich are given in table 2.2.

Table 2.2. Control Section Service Conditions.

CIRCUITCONDITION OWNER CODE MEANING

INS NO 00 Normal operational condition.OM 04 Pre-operational or restarting condition.

OUT NO 10 Out of service.

ABL NO 20 Control Section not connected or no valid package available.SAS1 23 Control Section connected and cannot become operational.

NIN NO 30 Control Section not installed.OM 34 Reinitialisation condition.



3. MAINTENANCE

3.1. CONTROL SECTION TESTING

The control section hardware is tested properly before leavining factory and therefore nottested during operation. However, during system start up the CPU and PPU PROMcontents is tested on errors.

3.2. SWITCHING SECTION AND PERIPHERAL SECTION TESTING

There are two methods of testing the hardware of the switching section and PM:automatically and manually.

3.2.1. Automatic Test

The automatic test can be subdivided into the test-loop carried out on AutonomouslyBlocked circuits (ABL) and the test loop carried out on In Service Circuits (INS). These testscommence from the moment the power is applied.

If, during the INS test loop, a fault is found the circuit condition of the PCT concerned is setto ABL and an alarm report will be stored in the history buffer ("PCT fault"). In this way thePCT is blocked for call processing.

The ABL test loop now picks up the ABL-PCT and keeps checking it periodically. As soonas no fault is found the PCT is made available for call processing again. The PCT faultalarm is withdrawn.

3.2.2. Manual Test

The Manual Test does a part of the automatic test and is activated by OM-procedures. Intable 3.3 the applicable tests are given. The Manual Test is activated from the MaintenancePC , from which also the fault reports can be read out.

PCTs to be manually tested can be set to circuit condition INS, OUT or NIN.

DLCs can only be tested manually in the circuit condition NIN.

A fault discovered in a PCT does not cause its circuit condition to change. It is, however,reported (alarmed). An alarm is also given if a test cannot be carried out.



Figure 3.1. PCT Test Summary.

OUTTEST

NINTEST

INSTEST

ABLTEST

Circuitcondition

ABL INS OUT NIN

MANUALTEST

AUTOMATICTEST

PCTTEST

The Manual Test can be run in an operational system, although a PCT cannot be used fortelephony while it is being tested.

Table 3.1. Survey of Tests.

HARDWAREAUTOMATIC TEST

LOOPBACKTEST 1)

FUNCTIONALTEST

MANUAL CONTROLLEDTEST

LOOPBACKTEST 1)

FUNCTIONALTEST

PMC:- Break in Circuit (BIC)- Receiver Dialtone (RDT)- Receiver Keytone (RKT)

xxx

xxx

RST-KD:- Receiver Keytone (RKT)- Receiver Dialtone (RDT)

xx

xx

RST-IMOM:- Multi frequency receiver (MFC) x x

ACC / ALC:- All PCTs x x x

ATU:- All PCTs x x x 2)

Notes: 1) Loopback test: also referred to as CODEC test.2) Not all ATU types can be tested, because the hybrids of not all ATU types can

be forced in a state that they echo an acoustical signal.



3.3. SWITCHING SECTION AND PM TEST ROUTINES

Loopback tests are performed with the aid of an SKT and an RKT. The digits sent arelooped back by the PCT under test, by putting the hybrid in unbalance. When the hybrid isin unbalance the acoustical signals are echoed.

During the Loopback test, the control hardware for the associated CODEC is fully tested.

In functional tests, where possible, a sending unit is linked through the switching networkwith a compatible receiving unit and together completely functionally tested (SDT RDT, SKTRKT, MFC sender MFC receiver).

If a fault is discovered, the unit under test is linked to another one and tested again todetermine which of the two originally connected units is defective.

Example: A CODEC test of PCTx to be tested is tested with a randomly chosen RKT, e.g.RKT1. The processor instructs PCTx to successively return all digit codes. Thecodes are received by RKT1. If RKT1 fails to pass on a digit to the processor, orpasses it on incorrectly then PCTx is tested again, e.g. with RKT3. If the faultreoccurs, PCTx is considered as the faulty unit.

The sequence in which PCTs of a given type are tested is equal to the sequence in whichthe hardware addresses have been input during PE data load. The sequence algorithmapplies equally to the Automatic INS test, the Automatic ABL Test and the Manual Test.

The circuits to be tested by the manually initiated test should be put into a so called 'targetlist' by an OM procedure. After this, the test should be started by another OM procedure.Finally the test results can be found in the Alarm Buffers.

After a cold or a warm start the automatic test cycle begins again with PCTs of the first typespecified.

3.4. MONITORING ROUTINES

In addition to the previously mentioned hardware tests, the software executes a number ofchecks which enable special situations to be recognized, including:

- PCT permanently busy/idle. A PCT which remains busy, or idle for more than a specifiedtime, is reported (an alarm is given).

- Masterboard not present or activated. This situation is only monitored when amasterboard is specified by the associated project engineering procedure.

- Line blocked by distant exchange.- No SOPHO-SET or LAM connected.



- Dial tone time out on a trunk.- MASTER PCT of PCT not activated.- Board physically absent or not activated. When a board is removed from the system, it is

recorded almost immediately. Removal of a board with a PCT in circuit condition INS willgenerate an alarm.

- An excessive number of unexpected events, arriving from the PM, offered to the garbagebuffer. These are events which:. Cannot be injected by system users;. Do not point directly to a routine in the system, and could indicate a software error.The garbage buffer is slowly leaking. Each day a message is deleted. If more messagesare entered than deleted, overflow is detected. After this detection the buffer is blocked,hence no more messages will be accepted, and an alarm is generated.

3.5. ALARM GENERATION

Some faults generate an immediate alarm, others do not generate an alarm unless a faultreoccurs within a given time period. This is determined in the History Buffer.

3.5.1. History Buffer

If a fault is detected, it is reported in the History Buffer or an existing report in the Buffer isupdated. A fault report comprises:

- Hardware address to identify the fault location;- Alarm code (4 digits) to identify the fault type;- Number of detections;- Date and time of the last detection;- Additional information.

There is an integration parameter (PE parameter) which determines whether and when analarm will be generated (table 3.3.). More details are given in table 3.4.

Table 3.3. Alarm Integration.

VALUE OF INTEGRATIONPARAMETER ALARM GENERATION INTEGRATION

CATEGORY

0 No alarm. c1...98 After two detections within an interval of

15 x n minutes.n = parameter value (1...98).

b

99 After one detection. a



Table 3.4. Survey, History Buffer.

INTEGRATIONCATEGORY

FAULT ALREADY

REPORTED

WITHININTEGRATION

INTERVAL

ACTIONS

HISTORY BUFFER FAULT REPORT TOANY ALARM BUFFER

c - - New report.Old report (if any) is frozen.

no

b no - New report. no

b yes no New report.Old report is frozen.

no

b yes yes Update of old report:- number of detections;- date and time of latest

detection.

yes

a no - New report yes

a yes - Update of old report:- number of detections;- date and time of latest

detection.

yes

3.5.2. Alarm Buffers

Fault reports may automatically be copied from the history buffer into the Major alarmbuffer, Minor alarm buffer, or Silent alarm buffer. Reports entered into the Major buffer orMinor buffer are visually indicated on the MPC, operator console and/or an alarm box. Avisual alarm indication will be accompanied by an audible alarm indication if the fault hasnot previously been reported.

There are no visual or audible alarm indications in the case of fault reports entered into theSilent alarm buffer, except for the MPC. On the MPC screen a visual indication is given forthe silent alarm.

The date and time in a report transferred from the History buffer to an alarm buffer does notchange.

A count is maintained of the number of times a given fault report is re-entered into an alarmbuffer. It is reset to zero each time the alarm concerned is reset.

Alarms can be reset as follows:

- Automatically via an automatic recovery mechanism (not applicable to all alarm codes).In the chapter that describes the actions in case of alarms the automatic recovery isabbreviated ”AR”.

- In the event of a PCT alarm by setting the circuit condition of the PCT concerned to OUT.- By resetting all fault reports in all three alarm buffers.



A fault report which has been in an alarm buffer for more than 100 days is automaticallyreset.

Lamps and buzzer indications associated with alarm reports are supressed as soon as thealarm buffers concerned are reset.



4. LOADING AND RETRIEVING ISPBX SOFTWARE

This chapter describes:

- Connecting : how to connect an MPC to the ISPBX;- Installing : how to install software files on the MPC hard disk;- Preparing : how to prepare software and data for transfer to the ISPBX;- Loading : how to transfer software or data from the MPC to the ISPBX;- Retrieving : how to transfer software or data from the ISPBX to the MPC.

ISPBXs that use SSW 300 do not use EPROMs to store the software or information that theISPBX uses, except for a small boot PROM that controls initial start-up and loading of theISPBX software. The boot PROM is loaded and installed at the factory and other softwareor information is stored in Flash-EPROMs. An MPC is used to transfer software to or fromFlash -EPROMs (FEPROMs) on the CPU and peripheral cards; a V.24 serial link is used forthis. Peripheral cards are: PMC, DTX-I, DLC-U.

Notes : 1. Make sure you have the OM Commands Manual (MML, SSW 300), so that youcan look at the details and explanations of each MML command used in thischapter.

2. Take special care to note the definitions of “Loading ” and “Retrieving ” used inthis chapter.

3. FEPROMs are never removed from the SSW 300 ISPBXs (except if they arefaulty); also they are never placed in a PROM programmer. (The DATA I/OPROM PROGRAMMER is no longer used with SSW 300 ISPBXs).

4. The ISPBX power supplies should have been tested before software isloaded/retrieved.

4.1. INTRODUCTION

A local OM session must be established before software can be transferred; the MPC UserGuide describes how to set up a local OM session.

Software that is transferred to or from the ISPBX memory consists of three types:

- CPU software : SSW 300 (the basic ISPBX software package);- POM data : PE/OM data (Project Engineering/Operational Maintenance data).- Peripheral software : software for the peripheral cards.

Notes: 1. CPU software and peripheral software can only be loaded into the ISPBX(they cannot be retrieved from the ISPBX).

2. The PE data and the OM data are combined into one file - a POM data file.



3. The POM data file can be loaded from the MPC into the ISPBX (OMcommand: LDPOMD) or retrieved from the ISPBX to the MPC (OM command:DUPOMD, DUPOME).

4. For a full description of the OM commands used in this chapter, look in the OMCommands Manual (MML).

4.2. CONNECTING THE MPC TO THE CPU CIRCUIT BOARD

Figure 4.1. shows where the CPU circuit board is located in the exchanges.

Figure 4.1. Locating the CPU Circuit Board (CPU-ME in each ISPBX).

Control Shelf

(master cabinet)

CPU

Card

CPU

Card

108104

SOPHO iS3030SOPHO iS3010

Control Shelf

Figure 4.2. shows how and where to connect the MPC to the CPU circuit board.

* The printer is optional

Figure 4.2. Connecting the MPC to the CPU-ME.

CPU-ME

0123

For a local session the MPC should be connected to port 1, 2 or 3

of the CPU-ME. For loading CPU software port 1 must be used.

(The port chosen should not be in use for any other purpose when

software is being transferred.)

If the REBOOT command is used while the MPC is connected to a

port other than port 1, then, after the command is completed, the

MPC must be disconnected from that port and connected instead

to port 1.

Serialport

Parallelport

ShelfPRINTER

*



4.3. INSTALLING FILES ON THE MPC HARD DISK

The ISPBX is supplied with diskettes that contain software to be loaded into FEPROM. Ondiskette number 1 there is a program called “INSTALL.EXE”, which is used to installsoftware files on the hard disk. Before you load software into the ISPBX make sure thosesoftware files are on the MPC hard disk; use the INSTALL program. Do this as follows:

- Insert diskette number 1 into a floppy disk drive;- Make sure the screen prompt is the one relating to the drive with the floppy disk in it;- Type INSTALL and press return;- Follow the prompts that appear on the screen.

As you follow the prompts the ISPBX software files will now be copied to the hard disk *

* ISPBX software means CPU, PPU or other peripheral software.

4.4. PREPARING SOFTWARE AND DATA FOR THE ISPBX

• CPU software The CPU software does not require preparation; it is bought from the ISPBX supplier,together with the ISPBX; the CPU software must, of course, be put on the MPC hard diskbefore it can be loaded into the ISPBX.

Use INSTALL.EXE to put the CPU software on the MPC hard disk (INSTALL.EXE checksthe hard disk to see if there is enough room on it).

• POM DataA software program called PG2 (Project Generator 2) is used on the PC to produce thePOM data file.

POM data = PE/OM data (Project Engineering/Operational Maintenance data).

The file contains both PE data and the OM data (POM data); the complete POM data fileis produced in response to a series of questions and can then be stored on floppy disk,ready for transferring (Loading) to the ISPBX.

Notes: 1. The data created by PG2 is written in Man-Machine Language (MML) and, ifslight changes are thought necessary, they can be made later using a text-editor or word-processor in “non-document” mode, for example, Wordstar ©.The details of MML can be found in the Operational Maintenance Command(MML) manual.

2. An ISPBX owner might wish to change the operation of an ISPBX at somelater date, for example, the ISPBX owner might want to change extension



numbers or the facilities available at an extension. This can be done usingOM on an MPC

• PPU SoftwareThe PPU software does not require preparation; it is bought from the ISPBX supplier,together with the ISPBX. Use INSTALL.EXE to put the PPU software on the MPC harddisk. (INSTALL.EXE checks the hard disk to see if there is enough room on it).

PPU software contains definitions related to all the PCTs that it is possible to install in theISPBX; the definitions include such things as signalling blocks; this does not mean that allthose PCT definitions are used by the ISPBX. (The POM data defines which PCTdefinitions are actually used.)

• PCT SoftwareDTX-I and DLC-U software is available on 31/2 inch floppy disks, which is to bedownloaded via the MPC. Also an INSTALL.EXE file is present on the floppy disk forpreparing the files by de-compressing the data files and transferring them from floppydisk to the hard disk. Consequently the prepared data files on the hard disk with .DATextension can be downloaded to the DTX-I or DLC-U.

4.5. LOADING SOFTWARE AND DATA INTO THE ISPBX

4.5.1. Introduction

Software and data should be loaded into the ISPBX in the following sequence:

1. CPU software *;2. POM data;3. PPU software **;4. Other peripheral software ***.

* For loading CPU software, the MPC must be connected to port 1 of the CPU-ME card.

** PPU software can only be loaded into the ISPBX when PMC cards have beenprojected, therefore, PPU software should be loaded after POM data.

*** Other peripheral software can only be transferred if the related PMC is in service. Thismeans also that the software for the related PMC must already have been transferred.The peripheral itself must be projected and out of service.



OM commands are used on the MPC to load software into the FEPROMs. The MPC mustbe connected to the CPU-ME card and set to “Local OM”. The OM commands used arelisted in the following section, 4.5.2.

Figure 4.3. Loading ISPBX Software.

Load CPUSoftware

Load POMData

Load PPUsoftware

Load peripheralsoftware

4.5.2. Loading CPU Software (Flowchart)

Look at figure 4.4. and follow the sequence of OM commands and actions shown in thefigure; look also at the text that follows the figure.



Figure 4.4. Loading CPU Software.

CPU packageup to date

Load packagefrom MPC harddisk to ISPBX

Delete CPUpackage from

FEPROMs

Show CPUpackage identity

Connect MPCto ISPBX andstart local OM

session

Copy CPUpackage to

MPC hard disk

Switch theISPBX on

REBOOT

Start packagein ISPBX

Copy CPUpackage to

MPC hard disk

LOADING CPU

SOFTWARE **

* INSTALL is not an OM command. See

section 4.3.

Other commands shown in the figure are

OM commands.

** Look at the text that follows this figure for

a more detailed explanation of the

sequence shown by the flow-chart.

OperationalISPBX

Connect MPCto ISPBX andstart local OM

session

Is it the packagerequired ?

No

Yes

DIPACK

DEPACK

LDPACK

STPACK

Yes

CPU package

loaded ?

No

Newly installedISPBX

REBOOT

INSTALL *INSTALL *

4.5.3. Loading CPU Software (MML Commands)

The following explains how to load the CPU software package; it refers to figure 4.4.



1. Copy the CPU package to the MPC hard disk. (Look at section 4.3.)

2. Switch the maintenance PC on ; use the MPC menus to select and start a local OMsession. The MPC will try to establish an OM session with the ISPBX but will notsucceed unless the ISPBX is switched on.

3. Switch the ISPBX on . Now that power is applied to the ISPBX the Maintenance PCwill establish a local OM session with the CPU-ME in the ISPBX.

4. Start the Boot Program

REBOOT: ;

5. Display Package Identity

DIPACK: [<HW-ADDR>];

6. Is there a CPU package loaded in the ISPBX?Yes - go to step 7.No - go to step 9.

7. Is the CPU package identity the one required ?Yes - go to step 10.No - go to step 8.

8. Delete package

DEPACK: [<HW-ADDR>s],[<CLEAR-PROJ-PROM>];

9. Load the CPU package

LDPACK: [<HW-ADDR>s],<FILE-SPEC>[,<SYSTEM ID>];

10. Start the CPU package .

STPACK: ;



4.5.4. Loading POM Data and Peripheral Software (Flowchart)

Figure 4.5. Loading POM Data and Peripheral Software.

THIS ISOPTIONAL

Dumpprojecting

errors to MPC

Yes

INSTALL is not an

OM command. See

section 4.3.

Other commands

shown in the figure

are OM commands.

Project theperipherals

For other

peripheral

Set the peripheral(s)in service

Load peripheralpackage

Peripheral packageup to date

Ensure POM data package is onMPC hard disk

LOADING POM DATA *

* Look at the text that follows this

figure for a more detailed

explanation of the sequence

shown by the flow-chart.

** POM data can only be loaded if

CPU software has been loaded

before it.

Load POM datafrom the MPCto the ISPBX **

LOADING PERIPHERAL SOFTWARE *

LDPACK

SETSDS

Delete old peripheralpackage

DEPACK

POM files areloaded

LDPOMD

Copy POMdata to active

memoryCOLDST

DUPOME

Proceed to“LOADING

PERIPHERALSOFTWARE”

Copy peripheral softwarepackage to

MPC hard disk

Show peripheralpackage identity DIPACK

Peripherals

projected?

No

Only if the peripheral

is a PMC

SETINS

For PMC

INSTALL

WARMST

Peripheralpackage present?

For other peripheralFor PMC

Yes

No

Old peripheral

package?

Yes

No

ExecuteWARMST

(ONLY FOR PMCs)

Set out ofservice SETODS SETOUT



4.5.5. Loading POM Data (MML Commands)

Ensure the CPU package is loaded and started.Ensure that the POM data you require is on the hard disk (use PG2 to create it if it doesn'texist already).

Notes: When initialising a system ensure that :- the POM data correctly projects the PMCs and other peripherals that are to be

loaded;- the PMCs to be downloaded are out of service (SETODS);- the peripherals to be loaded are out of service (SETOUT).

Use the following commands to load POM data; refer also to figure 4.5..

1. Load POM Data

LDPOMD: <FILE-SPEC>;

2. Bring the POM data into use .

COLDST: ;

3. Check for Projecting Errors

DUPOME: <FILE-SPEC>;

This step is optional. You can use the command to dump POM data and projectingerror data from the POM memory to the Maintenance PC.

4.5.6. Loading Peripheral Software (MML Commands)

Use the following commands to load peripheral software; refer also to figure 4.5.Peripheral software is loaded from the MPC to the CPU card, the CPU card then passesthe software on to the PMC card. If the software just loaded is intended for the PMC it willbe stored in the PMC FEPROM; if the software is intended for another peripheral, the PMCwill route the data to the peripheral indicated. The peripheral will store the software in itsFEPROM.

Notes: 1. Take care that the valid CPU package is downloaded and started.2. When loading a PMC, the PMC must be “out of service”.3. When loading a peripheral, the PMC that controls that peripheral must already

be loaded with software and the PMC must be “in service ”.The peripheral must be “projected” and “out of service ” before it can beloaded with software. Look at the command SETODS/SETOUT below.



1. Copy the Peripheral package to the MPC hard disk. (Look at section 4.3.)



Note : In order to be consistent with the MPC Help file the hardware addresses areidentified by <HW-ADDR> or <EHWA>, although they have the samemeaning. The hardware address of the PMC is 11799 or 31799.

3. Set “Out of Service” and Display Service Condition

SETODS: <EHWA>s;

Notes:• Operational ISPBX

- The peripheral to be loaded with software or data must be out of service beforeloading can take place.

- When the peripheral is a PMC the SETODS command followed by the WARMSTcommand is required.

- For other peripherals the SETOUT command must be used (does not need thecommand WARMST).

- The command SETODS does not take the PMC out of service, it only marks thePMC with the service condition required. The command “WARMST” implements thatservice condition; only then is the PMC “out of service”.

• New ISPBX installation or new software installation- When an ISPBX system is being initialised the service condition of the PMCs is set

to NIN automatically (NIN = “Not in Service”). To set the service condition to OUTexecute command SETODS. In this case it is not necessary to execute aWARMSTART (because, in a new system, the PMCs have never been “in service”).

4. Warmstart

WARMST: ;

5. Delete Existing Peripheral Package .

DEPACK: [<HW-ADDR>s],[<CLEAR-PROJ-PROM>];

6. Load Package

LDPACK: [<HW-ADDR>s],<FILE-SPEC>[,<SYSTEM ID>];



7. Set and Display Service Condition

SETSDS: <HW-ADDR-PM>s;

4.5.7. Downloading Software for Peripheral Circuits DTX-I and DLC-U

DTX-I and DLC-U software is available on 31/2 inch floppy disks. Prepare the MPC asfollows:

- Define a directory on the MPC hard disk where the de-compressed data files should betransferred to and take care that the path settings are correctly. Also an existing MPCdirectory can be used, for example C:\USER>. In that case the paths are already set.

- The assumption is made that the floppy drive B will be used. Go to drive B and type:B:>INSTALL <return>

Example : In case preparing the DTX-I files the system will respond with:

Give source disk or <return> for ”B:\”:<return>

Give destination disk and directory specification :C:\USER> <return>

In case the prompt on the hard disk is still at C:\USER>, then a single <return> issufficient.

Creating file C:\USER\220002XX.DAT (XXX kB)

Input file : B:\220002XX.D01 Output file 220002XX.DAT

File C:\USER\220002XX.DAT created (XXX kB).

The data files are ready for downloading the DTX-I or DLC-U. Start the MPC program.

The DTX-I and the DLC-U software can be downloaded using the sequence explainedbelow.

1. Set Out of Service

SETOUT: <HW-ADDR>s/r ;

Used to set the DTX-I or the DLC-U out of service.

HW-ADDR : SCCPP, S = shelf 0 ...3; CC = card position 01 ... 10; PP = port number00 ... 31, 99 for the complete PCT board.



2. Delete Existing PCT Package .

DEPACK: <HW-ADDR>s,;

HW-ADDR : SCC99, S = shelf 0 ...3, CC = card position 01 ... 10.

The system will respond with : DELETE THE PACKAGE (Y/N) ? Y

Deleting the older PCT package should result in (example valid for DTX-I):Green LED : OnRed LED : Blinking




The following should be displayed (example valid for DTX-I):

Boot-12NC Boot Prom-ID Package-12NC Package-ID3522 254 XXXXX 3900 XX XX 0000 000 00000 0000 00 00

4. Load Package

LDPACK: [<HW-ADDR>s],<FILE-SPEC>,;

HW-ADDR : SCC99, S = shelf 0 ...3, CC = card position 01 ... 10.FILE-SPEC : XXXXXXXX

Loading the new PCT package should result in:Green LED : OnRed LED : Off




The following should be displayed (example valid for DTX-I):

Boot-12NC Boot Prom-ID Package-12NC Package-ID3522 254 14572 3900 XX XX 9562 XXX XXXXX 2200 XX XX



6. Set In Service

SETINS: <EHWA>s/r ;

Set in service the DTX-I or the DLC-U.

HW-ADDR : SCCPP, S = shelf 0 ...3, CC = card position 01 ... 10; PP = port number00 ... 31, 99 for the complete PCT board.

4.6. RETRIEVING POM DATA FROM THE ISPBX (MAKING A BACK-UP)

4.6.1. Introduction

OM commands can be used on the MPC to retrieve data from the FEPROMs; only POMdata and POM data errors can be retrieved. This facility is useful for making a back-up ofPOM data. The MPC can be connected directly to a V.24 port on the CPU-ME card orremotely via modems; the MPC “SETUP” menu should be used to select a “local OMsession” or a “remote OM session”, whichever is appropriate.The ISPBX uses two parts of FEPROM for storage and retrieval of POM data; see the partsof POM memory marked “Part 1” and “Part 2” in figure 4.6.

Figure 4.6. Making a System Back-up from an Operational ISPBX.

LDPOMD

DUPOMD

BKPOMD

BKPOMD

POM dataof runningsystem

Serialport

Serialport

Parallelport

PE part ofPOM datafrom FlashEPROM

step

AMPC

RAMRETRIEVING POM DATA

Part 1

POM dataloaded from theMPC

Part 2

Back-up area

Flash EPROM

PRINTER

RUN-TIME

DATABASE AREA

OM part of POM data from run-time database area of RAM

step

A

step

Cstep

B

COLDST



- Part 1 is used during initial software loading; it contains both the PE part of POM dataand the OM part. (If changes are made to a running system then the OM contents of the“run-time database” in RAM are changed; the contents of part 1 are not changed).

- Part 2 is used during a back-up; after the MML command BKPOMD is executed, itcontains PE data from part 1 of FEPROM memory and OM data from the “run-timedatabase” (RAM).

4.6.2. Making a Back-up

Look at figure 4.6. and carry out steps A to C shown in the figure; the MML commands youshould use for each step are shown below.

Step A. Back-up POM Data (within FEPROM)

BKPOMD: ;

Notes: 1. The command BKPOMD only starts the back-up process; use the commandDIPOMS to check whether the process is finished (see step B).

2. After the back-up is completed, part 2 of POM memory will contain two things:- PE data from part 1 of POM memory;- the latest OM data from the run-time database of the working ISPBX.

This means that, after the back-up, the POM data contained in part 2, (PE +OM), is the latest version of POM data that the ISPBX is using. This data canbe downloaded to the MPC as a back-up file (see the command“DUPOMD”).

Step B. Display the status of POM memory (Check to see if the back-up has finished)

DIPOMS: ;

Step C. Transfer Back-up to MPC (Retrieve POM Data into the MPC)

DUPOMD: <FILE-SPEC>,[<POM-PART>];

4.6.3. Other Commands

• Check for Projecting Errors

DUPOME: <FILE-SPEC>;

With this command you can dump the stored POM data and the related projecting errordata from the POM memory to the Maintenance PC.



• Clear POM Data

CLPOMD: <POM-PART>;

With this command you can clear one of the POM memory parts.

• Display Date and Time

DIDATI: ;

• Display Exchange Identity

DIEXID: ;





5. PROJECT DATA PROTECTION

In order to protect the contents of the various RAM memories in the event of the powerbeing interrupted two conditions must be complied with:

- The RAM memory must have a continuous voltage supply.- The uncontrolled write actions to be expected from the Motorola 68302 micro processor if

the CPU supply voltage (+5V3) falls off must not affect the RAM.

The first of these conditions is met by the EBU (Emergency RAM back-up Battery Unit). Ifthe RAM supply voltage (+VCMOS) falls off, then the supply of the RAM is taken over bythis battery (+4V BAT).

The second condition is met by the RAM back-up mechanism. Even before the voltagesconcerned have become too low, the PSU gives the signal EPF# which causes the 68302to be brought into the HALT condition.

When the CPU supply voltage returns to normal, the Motorola 68302 micro processorrestarts after some delay. In the intervening period the RAM is further protected bydisconnecting the supply for the RAM input drivers.

The circuits involved in the RAM back-up mechanism must be supplied normally, bothduring fall-off and return of the CPU supply voltage. For this reason these circuits areconnected to the +VCMOS/+4V BAT supply line.

Note: To allow signal EPF# to function properly, the replacement of a PSU must alwaysbe carried out in the following sequence:

- Disconnect the primary supply for the PSU.- Wait until the capacitors have fully discharged (approximately 30 seconds).- Take out the PSU.- Fit the (new) PSU.- Re-connect the primary supply.





6. THE HANDLING OF PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

The following should be observed when handling PWBs:

- Do not store PWBs in a high temperature or high humidity environment;- Transport PWBs in the original packing;- Do not hold PWBs by the components mounted on them.

Warning: Most PWBs include one or more Integrated Circuits (ICs) using CMOSTechnology. These ICs have extremely high input and output impedances andcan thus be damaged if exposed to static charges, such as those which canbuild up on clothing and body in a dry atmosphere. For protection all CMOSinputs and outputs on a PWB are linked with "low-ohmic" circuits.Nonetheless, the following is recommended:

. Wear an anti-static wrist strap and use an anti-static floor mat. Make surethese anti-static devices are connected to the exchange frame.

- Do not stack PWBs without protection.- Repair PWBs only in workshops equipped by PHILIPS for that purpose.- When, in exceptional circumstances, measurements must be made on a PWB or on the

back panel (using the card extender) care must be taken that no short-circuit is made to acircuit with a different supply voltage (+12 V, +5 V, -5 V, -12 V, -48 V).





7. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

7.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

This chapter explains how to install the SOPHO iS3010 and SOPHO iS3030, MDF cabinetsand combined equipment/MDF cabinets. It does not describe the installation of the wiring ofthe site. This is normally a separate task from that of installing the equipment. Therefore,the installation engineer should only have to connect the equipment to already installedtelephone and external line cabling and power cabling. The wiring of the MDF (MainDistribution Frame) is described in chapter 8 and the installation of the power supply andearth connections are described in chapter 15.

7.2. SITE REQUIREMENTS

The system should be installed in an environment which meets the following:

- Temperature range : -5°C to 45°C;- Humidity : 10% to 85%.

7.3. REQUIRED INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT

Apart from a complete set of tools (spanners, screwdrivers etc.) the following items arerequired:

- Knife for opening packing material.- Spirit level.- Universal wiring tool. This is required for cabling the MDF.- Tie wrap gun.- Drill and 10 mm masonry bit.- A multimeter which should be able to read:

. AC voltage;

. DC voltage;

. DC current;

. Resistance.- Check the items of equipment to be supplied are according the parts list.- 13 mm socket with ratched handle or a 13 mm box spanner with bar.

7.4. ANTISTATIC HANDLING

Static charges can cause serious damage of the equipment, especially on the printed wiringboards which uses ICs based on CMOS technology. Although special protective measures



have been taken, one should always hold 'ground' during handling the printed wiring boardsin order to protect the components on it. Diagram 330 and 331 show the plugs forconnecting the antistatic bracelet, which has to be used during replacement of PWBs. Thebracelet may also be an antistatic wristwatch with ground connection. Diagram 110 showshow to use the antistatic bracelet.

7.5. SITE CHECKS AND INSPECTION

Before commencing work, check that:

- The areas you need to be in have to remain accessible for the duration of the installationand testing of the system.

- All site wiring has to be completed and correctly identified.- The power and safety requirements have been met, accordingly the Philips requirements

and the local requirements.- A connection of a 'clean' earth must be available for the SOPHO iS3010 and the SOPHO

iS3030. - If local regulations require certain tasks (e.g. connecting the system to telephone

exchange lines) which must be done by specially trained people, these people areavailable in time.

7.6. UNPACKING, LOCATING AND FIXING THE CABINET

The unpacking of the equipment is done accordingly the procedure shown on the packing.When you have unpacked the equipment check it against the delivery note. If there aredifferences immediately report these to the supplier.

For locating the cabinets consult diagram on the template which is inside the packing. If thesystem consists of a separate equipment and MDF cabinet, the equipment cabinet islocated normally at the right side of the MDF cabinet. A cabinet is fixed to the wall bymeans of a bolt at the left and at the right side. Install the cabinets according followingmeasurements:

- Minimum distance between the top of the cabinets and the ceiling is 50 cm;- Minimum distance between the bottom of the cabinet and the floor is 10 cm,

recommended distance is 125 cm.- Minimum distance between the left/right of the cabinet and the wall is 45 cm;- Minimum distance between the front of the cabinet and the wall in front is 80 cm.- Minimum distance between the cabinets of a two cabinet SOPHO iS3030 should be 10

cm, when the cabinets are installed above another.

Diagram 155 shows the measurements for a two cabinet SOPHO iS3030.



If the cabinet(s) are to be mounted to the floor a floor stand should be used. Mountinginstructions for this stand are inside the packing of the floor stand. See also diagrams 150and 152.

Note: Floor-mounted types should not be located close to central heating radiators.Wall mounted cabinets should not be located above central heating radiators.

7.7. CABLING THE EMC IMPROVED CABINETS

7.7.1. EMC in General

The Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) Improved cabinets are available for SSW 300systems SOPHO iS3010/3030. The EMC properties of these cabinet are such that a correctinstalled SOPHO iS3010/3030 fulfil the Dutch and German EMC requirements.

The EMC specifications for The Netherlands are according to:

- EN 55022.- EN 55101/1-6, class B.

The EMC specifications for Germany are according to:

- VDE 0839;- VDE 0847;- VDE 0876;- VDE 0877;- VDE 0878;- FTZ 12 TR 1/6.87;- FTZ 12 TR 2/9.88.

To be able to comply to the specifications following have been implemented:

- Electro Magnetic closed cage cabinet;- EMC provisions in cables leaving the system;- Special way of leading the system cables.

7.7.2. Cabinet Composition

The SOPHO iS3010/3030 cabinets are a composite of a backpanel, a frame of two shelves,two metal plates to cover the PCT positions and the backpanel, a metal strip to cover a partof the power supply cable, an overall cover and the possibility to connect the (optional)EBU.



The cabinet iS3010/MDF is a composite of a SOPHO iS3010 cabinet, an MDF, MDF coverand the possibility to connect the (optional) EBU. For more detailed information refer to theHardware Configuration Manual.

Note: Despite the general EMC provisions, for some boards extra provisions have to betaken. These boards are ATU-ST02 and ATU-SS02.

7.7.3. Cabling the EMC Cabinets

SOPHO iS3030 cabinet is illustrated only, the described handling will be the same for theSOPHO iS3010 cabinet. Install the cables as follows:

1. All the cables leaving or entering the cabinet have to be EMC improved. The systemcables B between the MDF and the front connectors (F122 and Coax) are equippedwith an EMC shield (ferrite). These cables have to be led in a special way from the frontconnectors to the MDF, as shown in diagram 315.

2. The mains cable C should be winded 5 turns on the ferrite ring before leaving thecabinet and is to be led under the metal clamp D, which acts as a capacitor and shuntsthe HF currents to the cabinet, see figure 7.1. Position the ferrite ring behind the rectifierunit, lead the mains cable through the hole at the front of the rectifier unit and fix it to thetension relief, as illustrated in diagram 315.

Figure 7.1. Ferrite Core and Metal Clamp combination form a Low-Pass filter.

Ferrite core (5 windings)

Metal clampTransformer side Mains side

3. To obtain the best EMC result shift the 2 sets of ferrite shields as far as possible to thepoint where the cable exits the EMC enclosure, as illustrated in diagram 315.

4. It is very important to lead the cables according to diagram 315, especially if the cabinetis full. The EMC shields must be housed within the cabinet and they should not be seenfrom the outside with the front panel closed. Therefore, lead the cables in such a waythat no problem will occur when closing the front panel.

5. During replacement of the board in top left position, make sure the screws A (4 x tofasten the front panel on the left side) do not scratch the board, see diagram 316, this



may damage the board.Removing the first PWBs from the most left slot positions is made easier by the twoholes at the left cabinet side. To remove the PWB hold the PWB between your directionfinger and thumb (through the hole) and pull it out.

6. Install the metal lock E for the PWB boards according to diagram 315. During transportthe metal clamp has white foam rubber at the PWB side to protect the PWBs. Duringinstallation remove the foam rubber, insert the metal clamp in the special slots at theright side, shift the lock at the left end to the left and fasten the two screws.

7. The EBU pack is to be installed according to diagram 320. Connect the red wire to the+ and black wire to the - on the EBU. The wires should be pushed back in to the shelfas far as possible.

8. If the SOPHO iS3010 is equipped with a PSU-S, then there is no separate rectifier unitF present. In this case install the transformer (300 VA) as shown in diagram 317 andfasten the ferrite ring with a tie-wrap to the cabinet frame as shown.

9. Close the front panel and fasten the 15 screws S to obtain the best EMC result. Seediagram 316.

7.7.4. Installing the Trunk Filters for ATU-SS02/ST02

A special trunk filter is needed for installing the ATU-SS02 and ATU-ST02. The trunk filtersare installed at the bottom or at the top of the SOPHO iS3010/3030 cabinets accordingdiagram 318. One trunk filter is necessary per ATU-SS02/ST02 board and a maximum of 8trunk filters can be used per system. See also figure 7.2.

Figure 7.2. ATU-ST02 and ATU-SS02 installation block diagram.

Trunk Filter

F122 Connector F122 ConnectorATU-SS02ATU-ST02 MDF

Ferrite Rings

1. Insert the ATU in the correct slot position.

2. Fasten the trunk filter(s) to the cabinet as shown in diagram 318 by means of 2 tie-wraps. If the ATU is positioned in the upper shelf fasten the trunk filter at the top of the



cabinet and if positioned in the lower shelf fasten the trunk filter at the bottom of thecabinet.

3. To obtain the best EMC result shift the 2 sets of ferrite shields as far as possible to thepoint where the cable exits the EMC enclosure, as illustrated in diagram 318.

4. Connect the F122 connector to the trunk filter and lead the cable(s) as illustrated to theMDF.

7.7.5. Required EMC Improved Cables

The following EMC Improved cables are available for SOPHO iS3010/3030:

- F122/F122, 6 m, after this cable is cut in two pieces it is used to connect the externalMDF to the PCTs, excl. 10 pair disconnecting sofycom blocks, it also can be used tosupport the -48 V (PSU) to the MDF, max current 0.5 A/Core (total 2.5 A max.).

- F122/F122, 20 m, after this cable is cut in two pieces it is used to connect the externalMDF to the PCTs, excl. 10 pair disconnecting sofycom blocks, it also can be used tosupport the -48 V (PSU) to the MDF, max current 0.5 A/Core (total 2.5 A max.).

- F122/Sofycom, 1.60 m, this cable is used to connect the internal MDF to the PCTs, incl.10 pair disc. sofycom blocks, it also can be used to support the -48 V (PSU) to the MDF,max current 0.5 A/Core (total 2.5 A max.).

- F122/Sofycom, 0.90 m, this cable is used to connect the internal MDF to the PCTs, incl.10 pair disc. sofycom blocks, it also can be used to support the -48 V (PSU) to the MDF,max current 0.5 A/Core (total 2.5 A max.).

- F122/D-connector, 1.50 m, this cable is used to connect DTE/DCE equipment (MPC,SOPHO SystemManager, Alarm Unit, etc.) to the MLU, CPU, APU, etc. F122 at one sideand 25-pin male D-connector at the other side.

- F122/Coax, 1.60 m, 75 Ohm coaxial, it is used to connect a DTU F122 connector to acoax cable, it is assembled with an F122 at one side and two coax connectors at theother side. It is possible to connect two DTUs to the MDF with one F122/Coax cable.

- AOC/Sofycom, 1.60 m, it is used to connect an AOC to the internal MDF, it is assembledwith a F122 at one side and a sofycom 10 pair disconnecting block at the other side.

- AOC/Sofycom, 20 m, it is used to connect an AOC to the external MDF, it is assembledwith a F122 at one side and a sofycom 10 pair disconnecting block at the other side.



- F122/Trunk filter assembly, 0.80 m, it is connected between an ATU-SS02/ST02 and theexternal MDF, it is assembled with a F122 at one side and a trunk filter at the other side.

7.8. PMC-PMC CABLE INSTALLATION

In a two cabinet SOPHO iS3030 system the PMCs communicate to each other using aspecial network interconnection. This interconnection is done via a special PMC-PMC frontconnector cable. This is a pre-assembled cable existing of 2 shielded F122-F122 cables.

MASTER PMC SLAVE PMCFCA connected to FCCFCB connected to FCD

• EMC CabinetMount the PMC-PMC cable in the EMC cabinet according diagram 350. Take care thatthe blanked shield makes good contact with the bracket and the cabinet and mount the 2cables and bracket to the cabinet.

• Non-EMC CabinetMount the PMC-PMC cable in the non-EMC cabinet according diagram 351. Take carethat the blanked cable shield makes good contact with the bracket. Assemble the bracketand the two shielded cables and connect the bracket to the rectifier plate using therectifier plate screw as shown.

Lead the cables from the cabinets properly

7.9. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE EMC AND NON-EMC CABINETS

7.9.1. Different Installation Rules

The EMC and non-EMC cabinets differ from the installation point of view at several points.

1. The EMC improved and the not EMC improved cabinet are different types of cabinets.

2. Installing the PMC-PMC cable in a two cabinet SOPHO iS3030 system is different forboth types of cabinets. See diagrams 350 and 351.

3. Installing the mains cable differs slightly for both types of cabinets. See diagrams 319and 350.

4. Installing the EBU differs for both types of cabinets. See diagrams 319 and 320.



5. In an EMC improved cabinet EMC improved cables are used. Cables used in the non-EMC cabinet are not EMC improved.

6. In the EMC cabinets special trunk filters are used to connect the ATU-SS02/ST02 to theexternal MDF. See diagram 318.

7. In the non-EMC cabinet each PWB board position has its own lock, while the EMCcabinet is equipped with one PWB lock for all the upper and lower PWB board positions,see diagram 315..

8. In the non-EMC cabinet no cable support bar is present between the upper and thelower shelf.

9. In the non-EMC cabinet no metal front cover is present and there are no metal top andbottom covers.

7.9.2. Common Installation Rules

This section mentions the common installation rules for the EMC and non-EMC cabinets.

1. Installing the transformer and the rectifier unit is the same

2. Cable run to the MDF and the earth connection is the same.

3. The position of the V.24 connector is the same.

7.10. FLOORSTAND INSTALLATION

A floorstand is required if wall mounting is not possible or not preferred. The floorstands canbe combined side by side and for stability they must be placed against a wall.The floorstands include materials for mounting the systems to the floorstand.

There are two types of floorstands available, namely:

- Floorstand 1;- Floorstand 1.5.

The following can be mounted to floorstand 1:

- SOPHO iS3010 (MDF not included);- SOPHO iS3030 (MDF not included);- MDF for iS3030.



Refer to diagram 150 for installing Floorstand 1. Use detail A for combining the floorstandsside by side if necessary.

Floorstand 1.5 can be used in combination with the following systems:

- SOPHO iS3010 (MDF included);- SOPHO iS3030 with half sized MDF (MDF iS3010).

Refer to diagram 152 for installing Floorstand 1.5. Use detail A for combining thefloorstands side by side if necessary.





8. MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME

8.1. CONSTRUCTION

The Main Distribution Frame (MDF) is designed to facilitate the connection of Printed WiringBoards (PWBs) in the shelves to public and private telephone exhanges and telephonesets. It is housed in a single cabinet or housed in the system cabinet. The following types ofMDF are distinguished:

- MDF for SOPHO iS3010.This MDF contains one column of 10-wire-pair disconnecting and connecting blocks.

- MDF for SOPHO iS3030.This MDF contains two columns of 10-wire-pair blocks. The left column comprisesconnecting blocks used to terminate the external cabling. The right column comprisesdisconnecting blocks used to terminate the cables from the equipment.

The diagram range 400...500 show, how to terminate the cables of the various PCTs. Incase of a DTU, a coaxial connection can be required (see diagram 420). The coaxconnection is made as shown in diagram 450 (for more information see section 8.10.).

8.2. MDF BLOCK ASSIGNMENTS AND JUMPERING

The assignment of MDF blocks depends on the system configuration. Once you havedecided on a layout, write it down on a form attached to the cabinet. Jumpering on the MDFs is shown in the following diagrams:

- SOPHO iS3010 . . Diagram 340- SOPHO iS3030 . . Diagram 341

8.3. CABLE COLOUR CODE AND CONNECTIONS

The colours of the cables which are delivered with the ISPBX are standard for Philips. Ifcables are used which are not Philips, the colours of the wires can differ from country tocountry. In that case it is advised to consult local sources for information.

There is a difference in the colour code between a cable for external lines and a cable forconnection to a front connector. These codes are shown in diagram 120. As shown in thediagram a cable can be connected at one end to one F122 connector, or at one end to twoF122 connectors.



For stripping a cable consult diagram 121. The cable stripping instructions are valid forPhilips cables with eight pairs of wires.

8.4. FRONT CONNECTORS

The front connectors on the PWBs are of the F122 type. For inserting and removing thefront connectors consult diagram 122.

The identification of the front panel connectors of a standard ISPBX board is shown indiagram 100. Three front connector positions are identified: FA, FB and FC. Each positionis divided in four positions. Note that at the daughter board also connectors can be present. The connectors at adaughter board are also identified with FA, FB and FC, but in this case the connectors aresingle (and therefore not subdivided).

8.5. WIRING THE MDF

The connecting (and in some cases also the disconnecting) blocks are supplied asseparate items. In most cases the disconnecting blocks are supplied with wiring to connectthe PCTs. It is first necessary to form the wires of all incoming cables (from local and external) acrossthe blocks (see diagram 130) before locating them in the MDF.

To locate a block, simply push it onto the MDF magazine until it locks into position. Cablesfrom the PWBs are connected to the uppersides of the blocks while the blocks are inposition.

To remove a block, position your forefinger and tumb at one side of the MDF block in theway as shown in diagram 130. Pull the block towards you with your forefinger, which isbehind the brackets of the block. Repeat this action for the other side of the block.

• Connecting a Wire to a BlockFor connecting a wire to an MDF block consult diagram 130 and carry out the followingsteps.

Step Action

1 Feed the cable to its designated block via the rear of the MDF magazine.

2 Place the wire (unstripped) on the connecting grooves with leaving at least 30mm on the other side.



Step Action

3 Place the connecting tool in the groove of the element, the cutting blade on theinner side.

4 Push down firmly on the connecting tool, pressing the wire into the groove. Thewire will be cut automatically.

• Disconnecting a Wire from a BlockFor disconnecting a wire from an MDF block consult diagram 130 and carry out thefollowing steps.

Step Action

1 Remove the extractor from the body of the tool.

2 Place the extractor onto the MDF block.

3 Turn the head of the extractor towards the wire to be removed; while turning pullup at the same time.

8.6. LIGHTNING PROTECTION

A cartridge is designed to be plugged onto a connecting block (not a disconnecting block)on the MDF (see diagram 440). One arrester is required per line. In practice, arresterswould only be used on those lines most likely to be struck by lightning, i.e. external lines.

Note: The MDF concerned must be directly connected to an earth plate, otherwise thearresters will not provide any protection.

8.7. MUSIC-ON-HOLD INTERFACE

The Music-On-Hold Interface is a circuit used to connect a tone source, e.g. cassetterecorder, to a line circuit. Figure 8.1. shows the circuit which is required for that purpose.Music-On-Hold is a projectable facility. The projected line circuit must be known to theinstallation engineer. If MOH is required, each peripheral module (PM) in the system musthave one MOH circuit projected. The circuits as depicted in figure 8.1. can be made on sitebut it is also possible to use the MOH-I (Music-On-Hold - Interface) board. This boardhouses four interface circuits between the ALC circuits for MOH and a tone source. Theboard does not use the back panel and can therefore be used in any empty board positionin the system.



The connection to the line circuit should be made at the termination on the MDF.

Figure 8.1. Music-On-Hold Interface.

1 MΩ300 Ω

To interfacesfor othershelves

Tonesource0dB

ALC (PM 1)

2.2 µFa

ALC (PM 0)

MDF

b

a

b

a

2.2 µF

300 Ω

8.8. MODEM LINE UNIT (MLU)

The MLU is used to interface up to four modems to the system. It is a PWB having fourV.24 (digital) and four analogue connections and can be inserted in any pre-definedposition. The connectors can be wired as shown in diagrams 430 and 431.

8.9. DTU AND LTU CONNECTIONS

The DTU is used for a digital trunk connection which is built up of an incoming and outgoingcoax cable. Diagram 420 shows the coax cabling from/to the front connector of the DTU.Diagram 450 shows the strip with the coax connectors which are to be applied for the 2Mbit/s connection at the MDF. For assembling the coax connector and mounting it to thecable, see section 8.10.

If a DTU with an LTU (Line Terminating Unit) is used for a connection with a symmetricalwire pair on the MDF, consult diagram 401 and diagram 420.

The DTU derives a clock signal from the incoming signal. If the clock of the ISPBX is to besynchronised with the clock in the incoming signal, connect the coax connector on the DTUwith the upper or lower coax connector on the PMC (Peripheral Module Controller). If onecoax connector is already used, then a second coax connector can not be used.



8.10. ASSEMBLING THE COAX CONNECTORS

The trunk line connection at the DTU is an F122 connector (2x8 pins) at the front of theboard. This connector provides a 75 ohm asymmetrical connection. The cable used for thisconnection must be coaxial as wel as the connector at the MDF. The cable supplied for thispurpose consists of two coax cables. Both ends of the coax cables are terminated withF122 connectors. The 'B' connector must be removed and the coax cables must beterminated at the coax connectors at the MDF. The coax cable which is marked with a '1' isthe incoming link and must be terminated at the left coax connector of a pair (see diagram420). The cable which is marked with a '2' is the outgoing link and must be terminated atthe right coax connector of a pair. Diagram 131 shows the sequence (and the tools) forassembling the connector and fixing the cable to it. Note that there are two types of coaxcables possible: a cable with a diameter of 3.7 mm and a cable with a diameter of 5.6 mm.For fixing both types of cables, materials are supplied with the connector. Choose thematerials required for the applied type of cable.

Mount the connector to the cable by following the instructions in diagram 131. The capitalletters in the diagram which are denoted with an asterisk, are explained in more detail:

A* The plastic tube of the cable may not be cut totally through. This prevents the metalcasing to be damaged.

B* Remove the metal casing according to the dimensions given. C* Push the metal tube in the direction of the connector until it hits the connector. Mind

that the hole in the metal tube is totally filled with the metal casing of the cable.

If the tube is squeezed at the cable, check the dimension of the metal tube by means of theadjustment tool (denoted with *) shown in diagram 131. The 4.25 mm hole is used in caseof a cable of 3.7 mm and the 6.6 mm hole is used in case of a cable of 5.6 mm. If theadjustment tool cannot be placed over the metal tube, the squeezing tool has to beadjusted.





9. FINISHING INSTALLATION

9.1. CONNECTING THE OPERATOR POSITION

The following types of operator positions can be connected.

• The Analogue Operator Position and SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 50.These positions can be connected directly to the PMC with AOC (Analogue OperatorCard), or by means of the MDF and an operator connection box. See diagram 460 foroperator connection box. The maximum distance between the operator position and thesystem is 300 m.

• The SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30.The SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 is connected to the DOC (Digital Operator Card) bymeans of the MDF. Note that the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 also can be connected to aDLC-C/D - LDC line combination or to a DLC-U (no LDC required), which are projectedfor this purpose. The maximum cable length between the system and the operatorposition is 1000 m.

• SOPHO-SET S375 (In Supervisor Mode).If a SOPHO-SET S375 D is used as operator position it has to be connected to a DOC orDLC/LDC line which is projected for Main Common Night Extension. In this case theconnections to the AOC on the PMC are not used.

• SOPHO-SET K365 (In Supervisor Mode).A SOPHO-SET K365 can be used as operator position. It has to be connected to aKTLC-A/E circuit which is projected for Main Common Night Extension. In this case theconnections to the AOC on the PMC are not used.

To a DOC only one SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 or one SOPHO-SET S375 can beconnected. To an AOC two operator positions can be connected.

9.2. CPU - RS232C/V.24 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS

The CPU has an F122 connector block on the front side of which the lower three F122s areused as RS232C/V.24 interfaces. Following configurations are possible:

- VDU for logging messages;- Serial printer for toll ticket records/logging messages;- Modem;- PC with Maintenance PC, SOPHO SystemManager or Q-Manager software package;- Alarm Unit.



9.2.1. SSW 300.10 Interface Connections

For SSW 300.10 following rules should be observed:

- Port 0 is not a V.24 port and it presents the system alarms at V.28 level.- Local SOPHO SystemManager should be connected to port 1 of CPU-ME. When no

Local SOPHO SystemManager is used port 1 can be used for other applications.- Remote SOPHO SystemManager or Remote Maintenance PC should be connected to

port 2 of CPU-ME. It is not possible to have both connections at the same time, becausethey use the same port. When no Remote SOPHO SystemManager or RemoteMaintenance PC are used, port 2 can be used for other applications.

- When serial Toll-Ticketing or the Logging function is used, the output is always send toport 3 of CPU-ME. When serial Toll-Ticketing and the logging function are used at thesame time, the output of both functions is send to port 3 of CPU-ME. When thesefunctions are not used, port 3 can be used for other applications.

- The Local Maintenance PC or the Alarm Unit may be connected to port 1, 2 or 3 of theCPU-ME. When all the ports are occupied, the optional V.24 Interface Card (VIC)daughter board may be used to connect the Local Maintenance PC or the Alarm Unit.

Following shows the possible devices which can be connected to CPU-ME:

DEVICE PORT

- Local SOPHO SystemManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port 1- Remote SOPHO SystemManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port 2- Local Maintenance PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Any free port- Remote Maintenance PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port 2- Serial Toll-Ticketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port 3- Logging function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port 3- Alarm Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Any free port

9.2.2. SSW 300.20 Interface Connections

For SSW 300.20 following rules should be observed:

- Port 0 is not a V.24 port and it presents the system alarms at V.28 level.- The Local Maintenance PC or the Alarm Unit may be connected to port 1, 2 or 3 of the

CPU-ME. When all the ports are occupied, the optional V.24 Interface Card (VIC)daughter board may be used to provide 3 additional V.24 interfaces (ports 4, 5 and 6).



The following shows the possible applications which can be connected to CPU-ME:

- Local SOPHO SystemManager- Remote SOPHO SystemManager- Q-Manager on SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 50E or stand-alone PC- Local Maintenance PC- Remote Maintenance PC- Serial Toll-Ticketing- Logging function- Alarm Unit

Note: The function and configuration of the CPU-ME or VIC V.24 ports can be definedusing the OM commands shown in Table 9.1. (starting from SSW 300.20).Commands can be entered via an Operator Terminal or via a PC connected to anyfree V.24 port. The details of each command can be found in the OM CommandsManual.

Table 9.1. OM Commands used to configure the Functions of CPU-ME or VIC Ports(Starting from SSW 300.20).

OM COMMAND

MML OM CODEFUNCTION

ASBAUD 1061 Assign baud-rate of CPU-ME or VIC portsDIBAUD 1062 Display baud-rate of CPU-ME or VIC portsASPORT 1063 Assign application of CPU-ME or VIC portsDIPORT 1064 Display application of CPU-ME or VIC ports

9.3. V.24 INTERFACE CARD (VIC)

The V.24 Interface Card (VIC) is an optional board and should be used if the three V.24interfaces on the CPU-ME are not sufficient. If connected, the VIC provides three additionalgalvanicly isolated V.24 interfaces, which can be used for connecting any of theapplications that use a V.24 port on the CPU-ME. Figure 9.1. shows the V.24 ports and howto position the VIC on the CPU-ME.



Figure 9.1. Front View of VIC Card Mounting.

V.24Connectors

CPU - VIC

Connectors

CPU BoardFront Edge FAA Alarms (V.28)

FAB V.24 / V.28 Port 1

FAC V.24 / V.28 Port 2

FAD V.24 / V.28 Port 3

Port 6

Port 5

Port 4

Not Used

VIC BoardFront Edge

LEDsa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaa

GreenRedYellow

a a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaa

LOCAL

SOPHO SystemManager

REMOTE

MAINTENANCE PC

SERIAL TOLL-

TICKETING

AlarmUnit

The charteristics of the VIC V.24 ports are identical to the CPU-ME V.24 ports.

The ISPBXs are equipped with standard cables with a F122 connector at the CPU side anda V.24 connector at the other side of the cable. For mounting the connectors see diagram320. The standard cable which is mounted in the system between the CPU and the V.24connector, is equipped for connecting DCE. The signals on the pins of the V24 connectorare given in figure 9.2.

Figure 9.2. V.24 Cable in the ISPBX.

Generallyused

Only used forsynchronousor intelligentModems

2225182417212311

732854

206

D-connector malepin number

302103301307105303107305

CT 102 - GNDCT 104 - RXDCT 103 - TXDCT 109 - DCDCT 106 - CTSCT 105 - RTSCT 108 - DTRCT 107 - DSR

F 122Pin number

GYBL / BKGY / BKBR / BKYW / BKWT / BKGN / BKPK / BK

101102104106108304306308

CT 125 - CICT 142 - TICT 141 - LLCT 113/114 - TSETCT 115 - RSETCT 140 - RILCT 111 - DSRSCT 126 - STX

RD / BKRDBLYWGNWTPKBR



If DTE (e.g. the Alarm Unit) is to be connected to a V.24 connector, a NULL-Modem cable(Modem By-pass cable) is required. An example of NULL-Modem cable is given in figure9.3.

Figure 9.3. Example of a NULL-Modem cable.

* Some printer devices use for RTS pin 11 instead of pin 4.

732854206

73285

*420

6

D-connector femalepin number

D-connector femalepin number



Note that there can be minor differences between NULL-Modem cables for various devices.It is adviced to consult the manual(s) of the devices, which are to be connected to the V.24connectors.

For EPSON printers with interface board 8143 the NULL-Modem cable as given in figure9.4. should be used.

Figure 9.4. NULL-Modem cable for EPSON Printer with Interface Board 8143.

D-connector femalepin numberPrinter side

D-connector femalepin number.ISPBX side

732854206

73285

1120

6

CT 102 - GNDCT 104 - RXDCT 103 - TXDCT 109 - DCDCT 106 - CTS

CT 108 - DTRCT 107 - DSR

CT 102 - GNDCT 104 - RXDCT 103 - TXD

CT 108 - DTRCT 107 - DSR



9.4. REMOTE INTERFACES HARDWARE

The remote interfaces allow the ISPBX to be controlled from a greater distance via public orprivate telephone lines. Figure 9.5. shows the remote interfaces layout.

The following equipment is required when remote applications are used:

- 2 Hayes or Hayes compatible V21/V22/V22bis modems, one at each end of the remotelink;

- Remote terminal, Remote Maintenance PC, Multi Site (Remote) SOPHO System-Manager or printer at remote location;

- Cables. Two cables are required:. CPU-ME - Hayes Modem V.24 cable (1);. Remote Item - Hayes Modem V.24 cable (2).

- Public or private telephone line.

Figure 9.5. Remote Interfaces Layout.

a

a aa a

Remote

Maintenance PC

PC with MSSSM* Terminal Printer

V.24 / V.28ports

CPU-ME(mother board)

1

2

3

V.24 cable

PSTN

or

Private LineHayes (compatible)

modem

Hayes (compatible)

modem

Full duplex

V.21/V.22/V.22bis

* MSSSM : Multi Site SOPHO SystemManager

Alarms

(1)

(2)

or or or

9.5. IPH-A AND IPH-B INSTALLATION

The IPH-A and IPH-B (ISDN Protocol Handler) are used as a pair of boards which has to beconnected together by means of two flat cables (34 pol. each) (see diagram 425 and 123).Always connect the flat cables after the boards are installed in a shelf.



9.6. INSERTING AND REMOVING ICs

During installation it can be necessary to install or change PROMs or other types of ICs. Ifthese ICs are to be inserted in, or removed from, a package as shown in diagrams 140 and141, follow the procedures in the following subsections.

Note: ICs are very sensitive to static charges. During handling the ICs (PROMs), alwaysuse the bracelet (or antistatic watch with ground connection) as shown in diagram110.

• Inserting an IC (See Diagram 140)

Step Action

1 Mount the brackets which are applicable for the IC to be inserted. Apply the 40pins brackets for the 40 pins ICs, the 28 pins brackets for the 28 pins ICs and the24 pins brackets for the 24 pins ICs.

2 Tighten the IC in the tool.

3 Insert the IC in the package.

4 Remove the tool and press the IC home with the fingertips.

5 Turn the tool upside down and set the tool on the package.

6 Press the package (using the tool) onto the PCB.

• Removing an IC (See Diagram 141)

Step Action

1 Adjust the legs in the position according to the size of the IC. Before tighten thescrews, place the adjusting plate between the legs. Tighten the screws andremove the adjusting plate.

2 Push the levers from each other.Step Action

3 Place the tool on the package. The four legs must hit the PCB.

4 Press the tool at the sides with one hand.



5 Move the levers to each other with the other hand. Now the package movesupwards.

6 Remove the tool.

7 Take the IC from the package. Mind that no pins of the IC are touched by thehand. (To take the IC out of the package, it is also possible to use the tool forinserting an IC. In that case it is not necessary to touch the IC by hand.)

9.7. STRAPPING OPTIONS

Some PWBs are equipped with straps in order to adapt them to local conditions, e.g.attenuation, impedance, frequency of received pulses etc. See chapter 10 for details.

9.8. ALARM UNIT

In this section are described: the Alarm Unit itself and Installation aspects of the Alarm Unit.In each SOPHO iS3010/3030 exchange only one Alarm Unit can be used.

9.8.1. General

The Alarm Unit is an interface between the CPU and the external alarm input switches. Italso carries visual and acoustical alarm indicators. The Common Answering Night Service(CANS) relay can be connected to this device too. Furthermore, two switches are mountedon the Alarm Unit motherboard, e.g.:

- The Emergency bypass switch;- The buzzer reset switch.

The Alarm Unit is either mains powered or powered by a 48 Volt external supply. This 48Vsupply for the Alarm Unit can either be connected to the exchange or to a 48V emergencybattery (optional).

• Alarm IndicationsThe Alarm Unit carries the following alarm indications:- Minor Alarm LED;- Major Alarm LED;- System Down LED;- Power ON LED;- Internal buzzer.



The Minor alarm LED, the Major Alarm LED, and the System Down LED reflect the statusof the ISPBX alarms. The System Down LED also is alight if the communication with theCPU is lost.

The Power On LED indicates the status of the Alarm Unit:- LED on =power on;- LED off = power off.

The buzzer is used as an additional alarm indicator. It is switched on if the CPU has senta buzzer-on message or if communication with the CPU is lost. The buzzer can beenabled and disabled by means of a DIL switch in the Alarm Unit.

• Relay Contacts Available for the UserThe following relay contacts are provided for use by the customer: - Minor alarm contact;- Major alarm contact;- System down contact;- Buzzer contact;- Common Answering Night Service (CANS) contact.

The first three contacts are connected in parallel with the associated alarm LEDs. Thebuzzer contact is connected in parallel with the internal buzzer. The CANS contact isswitched by an internal CANS relay (maximum contact load: 100mA at 48V DC).

None of these contacts is connected to any internal voltages.

• Two Switches of the Alarm UnitThe two switches of the Alarm Unit have the following functions:- Emergency bypass switch: this switch can be used to initiate an emergency situation

whereby trunk lines are directly connected to predefined extensions. The switch isimplemented as a push button that is toggling the emergency state on or off. If theemergency bypass is activated the associated LED is alight, if the bypass isdeactivated the bypass LED is off.The emergency bypass switch can be enabled or disabled by means of a DIL switch inthe Alarm Unit.

- Buzzer reset switch: this switch can be used to reset the internal buzzer and the buzzercontact.

• Sense Inputs on the Alarm UnitThe following Sense Inputs are present on the Alarm Unit:- External alarm sense input 1;- External alarm sense input 2;- Buzzer reset sense input;- Emergency Bypass sense input.



The external alarm inputs allow the connection of customer defined alarms. Alarm senseinput 1 is related to alarm code 1005, whereas alarm sense input 2 is related to alarmcode 1030.

The buzzer reset input can be used to connect an optional external buzzer reset switch.

The emergency bypass input can be used to connect an optional external emergencybypass switch. The emergency bypass sense input can be enabled or disabled by meansof a DIL switch in the Alarm Unit.

Note: When the emergency bypass sense input is not used, it must be disabled!

9.8.2. External Connections

The external connections are eccessible after opening the Alarm Unit.The alarm unit can be opened on the rear side by gently pulling apart the upper and lowerside of the cover. Be careful with the LEDs when replacing the printed wiring board into thecover.

Note: Always disconnect the primary supply from the Alarm Unit before opening thecover.

Figure 9.6. gives the lay out of the Alarm Unit's printed wiring board.

Figure 9.6. Layout of The Alarm Unit.

Fuse

Mains cord

V.24 Connector

Connector blocks

281 14 15

DIL switch

8

1

Cable entry

WARNING : DO NOT OPEN COVER BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWERSUPPLY

Table 9.2. gives a survey of the user applicable connections, wheras figure 9.7. gives theposition of the relay contacts when the relay is not energized.



Figure 9.7. Relay Contact Layout.

1 2

3(Relay not activated)

Table 9.2. Connector Block description.

PIN NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARK

1 48 V DC power supply input polarity is free2 48 V DC power supply input polarity is free3 not connected -

4 external alarm 1 -




8 buzzer reset -

9 buzzer reset -

10 emergency bypass -

11 emergency bypass -

12 minor alarm relay contact 1 see figure 9.6 / table 9.3.



15 major alarm relay contact 1 see figure 9.6 / table 9.3.



18 system down relay contact 1 see figure 9.6 / table 9.3.



21 buzzer relay contact 1 see figure 9.6 / table 9.3.



24 CANS relay contact 1 see figure 9.6 / table 9.3.



27 supply voltage CANS relay only use recommended relay

28 supply voltage CANS relay only use recommended relay



Table 9.3. gives the status of the contacts with its function.

Table 9.3. Switch Conditions.

FUNCTION RELAY ACTIVATED RELAY NOT ACTIVATED

Minor alarm Minor alarm . . . . off Minor alarm . . . . onMajor alarm Major alarm . . . . off Major alarm . . . . on

System down System down . . . off System down . . . on

Buzzer Buzzer . . . . . . . . off Buzzer . . . . . . . . on

CANS CANS . . . . . . . . on CANS . . . . . . . . off

Note: The sense inputs may not be connected to any external voltages!

How a sense input is activated, by open or by closed loop is depicted in table 9.4.

Table 9.4. Sense Inputs.

SENSE INPUT FUNCTION ACTIVATED

External alarm 1 loop closedExternal alarm 2 loop closed

Buzzer reset loop closed

Emergency bypass loop open

For the loop the characteristics as given in table 9.5. are specified.

Table 9.5. Characteristics of Sense inputs.

PARAMETER SPECIFICATION

minimum resistance open loop 1 M Ohmsmaximum resistance closed loop 100 Ohms

Maximum loop current 0.45 mA

9.8.3. DIL Switches

The function of the DIL switches located inside the Alarm Unit is given in table 9.6. Theposition of the DIL switches on the board is depicted in figure 9.5.



Table 9.6. DIL Switch Functions.

SWITCHNUMBER DEFAULT DESCRIPTION

1 off off : CANS rhythm = 1 second on / 4 seconds offon : CANS rhythm = continuously on

23

offoff

2 3off off . . . . 300 baudoff on . . . . 1200 baudon off . . . . 2400 baud

4 on off : Emergency bypass switch (on front of the Alarm Unit) disabledon : Emergency bypass switch (on front of the Alarm Unit) enabled

5 onoff : Emergency bypass sense input enabledon : Emergency bypass sense input disabled. (If input not used it must

be disabled!)

6 on off : Internal buzzer disabledon : Internal buzzer enabled

7 on off : Wachtdog timer off (only for factory test purposes).on : Wachtdog timer on. For normal operation always 'on'.

8 on off : No functionon : No function

9.8.4. CANS

The external CANS relay can be connected to the connector block inside the Alarm Unit.The power supply of this CANS relay is internally fused with 315 mA / 250 Volts. Therecommended connection for the CANS relay is given in figure 9.8.

Figure 9.8. Recommended Connection of CANS Relay.

Polarity free

24 25 26 27 28

CANSRELAY

9.8.5. V.24 Interface

The serial connection between the Alarm Unit and the CPU is according to the V.24(RS232C) standard. Any of the V.24 D-connectors in the ISPBX cabinet (which areconnected to the CPU) can be used for this purpose. Note that the upper port on the CPUboard is not used for V.24 connections. The Alarm Unit must be connected to a V.24 D-connector by means of a Null-Modem (Modem By-pass) cable which can be delivered withthe Alarm Unit. This type of cable is also known as cross cable. The layout of the cable isgiven in figure 9.3.



9.8.6. Power Connections

The Alarm Unit can be powered by means of the Mains power or by means of an external48V power source. This 48V power source can be the ISPBX. (The 48V termination at theMDF, from of the Power Supply, should be used, see diagram 321.) If the Alarm Unit isconnected to the ISPBX, there are requirements for the resistance of the cabling. Twosituations are depicted in figure 9.9. with the calculation rules to determine the maximumallowed resistance of the cables.

Figure 9.9. Recommended Connection of CANS Relay.

48V Power Conn. 'a'

V.24 ConnectionISPBX

Alarm Unit

Ra < 40 ohm

48V Relay Power 'b'48V Power Conn. 'a'

V.24 ConnectionISPBX

Alarm Unit

CANS Relay

10Ra + Rb < 260 ohm

9.8.7. Power up

After power up the Alarm Unit performs several hardware tests and software tests. Aftersatisfying completion of these tests the Alarm Unit is initialized. All alarms are switched offexcept for system down. When communication with the CPU has been established, thesystem down LED is switched off.

If one of the tests fails, an error state is entered. This is indicated by flashing LEDs.

9.9. START-UP AND JOB COMPLETION

After installing the equipment, carry out the following steps to make the system operational.

Step Action

1 Connect the Emergency Battery. In SOPHO iS3010/3030 the red wire must be connected to the terminal markedwith a '+' and the black wire to the terminal marked with a '-' (see diagram 321).



Step Action

2 Switch on the power to the system. The LEDs on the CPU light.

3 Set the operator position to the AM (Administrative) mode. Key in 6020 <SP><E> toread out the major alarms and after that 6021 <SP><E> to read out the minoralarms. If an alarm code appears consult the OM commands manual for the relatedmeaning and press the AM button again to return to AM mode.

4 Key in 6029 <SP><E> to clear the alarms and after that 6027<SP><E> to clear thehistory buffer. The system will be operational.

As soon as you have completed the installation, clear the site of packing materials, surplusequipment and dust that you may have caused, through drilling for example. The working ofthe system should then be demonstrated to the customer's satisfaction.

All necessary paperwork should be completed at this stage.





10. DIL SWITCHES AND STRAP SETTINGS

A number of boards in the ISPBX have DIL switches and/or straps. These switches orstraps are set to the correct position in the factory. However it may be necessary to checkthe position and, if wrong, to correct the position during installation or replacement of theboards.This subject contains all the boards which do have those switches/straps. Also directionsare given how to set those switches/straps to suit a particular mode of application.

In general the PCT boards have more than one circuit mounted; so in that case theswitches/straps have to be set for each circuit individually.



10.1. ANALOGUE LINE CIRCUIT-E

The analogue Line Circuit-E (ALC-E) is a board that contains 16 peripheral circuits. ThisALC-E carries one strap that determines whether this ALC is actually using 8 or 16 circuits.In this way an ALC-E can also be used as an ALC-A. Figure 10.1.1. gives the straplocation.

Figure 10.1.1. Strap Location ALC-E.

103 101

X1-1BB

FAD

BP

FCA

Note : The strap is drawn in the position for 16 Circuits.

For 8 Line Circuits place the strap on 102-103.

MARK



10.2. ANALOGUE TRUNK UNITS

10.2.1. ATU-EM (2 Wire)

Figure 10.2.1. Strap Location.

= Closed

= Open

BB

BP

X 8.1X 8.2X 8.3X 8.4X 5.1

X 5.2X 5.3X 5.4

X 7.1X 7.2X 7.3X 7.4

X 6.1X 6.2X 6.3X 6.4

X 4.1X 4.2X 4.3X 4.4

X 3.1X 3.2X 3.3X 3.4

X 9.1X 9.2X 9.3X 9.4

X 2.1X 2.2X 2.3X 2.4

X 1.1X 1.2X 1.3X 1.4

MARK

FBC

FCA

Note: The second identifier of the straps (1... 4) indicates the ATU circuit 0... 3.



Table 10.2.1a. ATU-EM (2-WIRE)

TI TB TM E

E & M

SIGNALS IDLE BUSY

TRANSMITTED ON M-WIRE

VV°°°°VV

°°VVVV°°

VVVV°°°°

Y°°Y°YY°

°YY°Y°°Y

BATTERYMINUS /OPEN LINE SIGNALLING

OPEN LINE /EARTHSIGNALLING

CLOSEDM/MM LOOP /OPEN LINE SIGNALLING

CARRIER EQUIPMENTRECEIVES TONE

VV°°°°VV

°°VVVV°°

VVVV°°°°

VV°°°°VV

°°VVVV°°

VVVV°°°°

B M O E B M O

VV°°°°VV

VV°°°°VV

VV°°°°VV

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°VVVV°°

°°VVVV°°

°°VVVV°°

°°°°°°°°

°°VVVV°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°VVVV°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°VVVV°°

VV°°°°VV

VV°°°°VV

VV°°°°VV

SIGNAL

RECEIPT

?

Y°°Y°YY°

°YY°Y°°Y

Y°°Y°YY°

°YY°Y°°Y

TABLE LEGEND

V = PARAMETER REQUIRED ?Y = YES+ = STRAP PRESENT (CLOSED)- = STRAP ABSENT (OPEN)° = NOT APPLICABLE

CARRIER EQUIPMENTRECEIVES NO TONE

OPEN LINE

EARTH OR E/EE LOOP

RECEIVED

ON E-WIRE

RECEIVED

ON E-WIRE OPEN LINE

EARTH OR E/EE LOOP

HEADER LEGEND

TI = TONE ON IDLETB = TONE ON BUSY TM = TONE ON MAINS FAIL E = EARTHB = BATTERY MINUSM = M/MM LOOPO = OPEN LINE

Note: Table 10.2.1a. and 10.2.1b. form one table.In table 10.2.1a one can search for the parameters required; then the corres-ponding strap setting can be found on the same horizontal line in table 10.2.1b.



Table 10.2.1b. ATU-EM (2-WIRE).




987654321

++++++++

--------

--------

--------

--------

++++++++

++++----

++++----

++++----

----++++

----++++

----++++

--------

--------

++++++++

+-+-+-+-

+-+-+-+-

+-+-+-+-

--++--++

--++--++

--++--++

STRAPS X 1...9

-+-+

--++

1240620620

0

178011601160540

- Vb MMEARTH

1240620620

0

RESISTANCE(IN Ω )

BETWEEN M AND

Seetablebelow

Seetablebelow

Seetablebelow



10.2.2. ATU-EM (4 Wire)

Table 10.2.2a. ATU-EM (4-WIRE).

TI TB TM E

E & M

SIGNALS IDLE BUSY

TRANSMITTED ON M-WIRE

VV°°°°VV

°°VVVV°°

VVVV°°°°

Y°°Y°YY°

°YY°Y°°Y




CARRIER EQUIPMENTRECEIVES TONE

VV°°°°VV

°°VVVV°°

VVVV°°°°

VV°°°°VV

°°VVVV°°

VVVV°°°°

B M O E B M O

VV°°°°VV

VV°°°°VV

VV°°°°VV

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°VVVV°°

°°VVVV°°

°°VVVV°°

°°°°°°°°

°°VVVV°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°VVVV°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°°°°°°°

°°VVVV°°

VV°°°°VV

VV°°°°VV

VV°°°°VV

SIGNAL

RECEIPT

?

Y°°Y°YY°

°YY°Y°°Y

Y°°Y°YY°

°YY°Y°°Y

HEADER LEGEND

TI = TONE ON IDLETB = TONE ON BUSY TM = TONE ON MAINS FAIL E = EARTHB = BATTERY MINUSM = M/MM LOOPO = OPEN LINE

TABLE LEGENDCARRIER EQUIPMENTRECEIVES NO TONE

OPEN LINE

EARTH OR E/EE LOOP

RECEIVED

ON E-WIRE

RECEIVED

ON E-WIRE OPEN LINE

EARTH OR E/EE LOOP

V = PARAMETER REQUIRED ?Y = YES+ = CLOSED (pos. 101 & 102)- = OPEN (pos. 102 & 103)° = NOT APPLICABLE



Table 10.2.2b. ATU-EM (4-WIRE).

--------

--------

13121110987654321

++++++++

--------

--------

--------

--------

++++++++

++++----

++++----

++++----

----++++

----++++

----++++

--------

--------

++++++++

+-+-+-+-

+-+-+-+-

+-+-+-+-

--++--++

--++--++

--++--++

Seetablebelow

Seetablebelow

STRAPS X 1...13

-+-+

--++

1240620620

0

178011601160540

- Vb MMEARTH

1240620620

0

RESISTANCE(IN Ω )

BETWEEN M AND

*) MM-WIRE GOES TO EARTH FOR COMPANDER

Seetablebelow

Seetablebelow

Seetablebelow

Seetablebelow

Seetablebelow

Seetablebelow




BIT X OF 4-WIRE COMMAND BYTE=0 *)BIT X OF 4-WIRE COMMAND BYTE=1 *)STRAP PRESENT WHEN X5 IS PRESENTNOT ALLOWED

+--+

-+-+

+-

AMPLIFIED MODE c / d WIRESUNAMPLIFIED MODE c / d WIRES

UNAMPLIFIED MODE a / b WIRESAMPLIFIED MODE a / b WIRES

+-

Note: Table 10.2.2a and 10.2.2b form one table.In table 10.2.2a one can search for the parameters required; then the corres-ponding strap setting can be found on the same horizontal line in table 10.2.2b.




101102103 101

102103

BB

X 4.4X 3.4X 10.4X 11.4

X 4.3X 3.3X 10.3X 11.3

X 1.4X 5.4

X 1.3X 5.3

X 1.2X 5.2

X 1.1X 5.1

X 7.2X 6.2X 2.2

X 13.1

X 13.2

X 13.3

X 13.4

X 12.1

X 12.2

X 12.3

X 12.4

X 7.1X 6.1X 2.1

X 7.3X 6.3X 2.3

X 7.4X 6.4X 2.4

X 4.1X 3.1X 10.1X 11.1

X 4.2X 3.2X 10.2X 11.2

X 9.1X 9.2X 9.3X 9.4

X 8.4X 8.3X 8.2X 8.1

BP

MARK

FAD

FCA

101102103

= Open (-)101102103

= Closed (+)

Note: The second identifier of the straps (1... 4) indicates the ATU circuit 0... 3.



10.2.3. ATU-CH02


X 1-2

X 2-4

X 2-3

X 2-2

X 2-1

BB

X 1-1

X 1-3

X 1-4

BP

MARK

FBC

Notes: - The second identifier of the straps (1... 4) indicates the ATU circuit 0... 3.- The straps of ATU 0 and 1 are drawn in the simultaneous signalling position; the

straps of ATU 2 and 3 are drawn in the loop signalling position.



10.2.4. ATU-ST26

• Long Line Adjustment

Table 10.2.3. Long Line Adjustment.

CIRCUIT INSTALLED OPEN INSTALLED

1 X1-1 X1-5 X2-1 / 101-1022 X1-2 X1-6 X2-2 / 101-1023 X1-3 X1-7 X2-3 / 101-1024 X1-4 X1-8 X2-4 / 101-102

• Short Line Adjustment

Table 10.2.4. Short Line Adjustment.

CIRCUIT INSTALLED OPEN INSTALLED

1 X1-5 X1-1 X2-1 / 102-1032 X1-6 X1-2 X2-2 / 102-1033 X1-7 X1-3 X2-3 / 102-1034 X1-8 X1-4 X2-4 / 102-103

• Test/Hold Current

Table 10.2.5. Test/Hold Current.

CIRCUIT 40/23 mAJUMPER INSTALLED ON

22/12 mAJUMPER INSTALLED ON

1 X2-5 / 101-102 X2-5 / 102-1032 X2-6 / 101-102 X2-6 / 102-1033 X2-7 / 101-102 X2-7 / 102-1034 X2-8 / 101-102 X2-8 / 102-103




103 101103 101

BB

X1-6

X1-1 X1-2

X2-1 X2-5

X2-2 X2-6

X2-3 X2-7

X1-2 X1-8

X1-3 X1-4 X2-4 X2-8

X1-5 103 101 103 101

103 101 103 101

103 101 103 101

BP

MARK

FBC



10.2.5. ATU-AS36

• Long Line Adjustment

Table 10.2.6. Long Line Adjustment.

CIRCUIT JUMPER TO BE INSTALLED JUMPER POSITION ”OPEN”

1 X1-13 X1-9 2 X1-14 X1-103 X1-15 X1-114 X1-16 X1-12

• Short Line Adjustment

Table 10.2.7. Short Line Adjustment.

CIRCUIT JUMPER TO BE INSTALLED JUMPER POSITION ”OPEN”

1 X1-9 X1-13 2 X1-10 X1-143 X1-11 X1-154 X1-12 X1-16

• Impulse Dialling InTo enable ”impulse dialling in”, install the following jumpers (in case of GSD).If a jumper position is left open ”impulse dialling in” is disabled (in case of UFS, 12KHz).

Table 10.2.8. Impulse Dialling In.

CIRCUIT A-WIRE DETECTION B-WIRE DETECTION

1 X1-17 X1-52 X1-18 X1-63 X1-19 X1-74 X1-20 X1-8

• The Wetting CircuitIf a jumper is installed the ”Wetting circuit” (43 kΩ) is enabled (in case of UFS).If a jumper is not installed the ”Wetting circuit” is disabled (in case of GSD).Table 10.2.9 gives the jumpers in relation to the circuits.



Table 10.2.9. Wetting Circuit Jumper.

CIRCUIT WETTING CIRCUIT JUMPER

1 X1-12 X1-23 X1-34 X1-4


X1-16

X1-12

X1-9

X1-13

BB

X1-5

X1-17

X1-1

X1-6

X1-18

X1-2

X1-7

X1-19

X1-3

X1-8

X1-20

X1-4

X1-10

X1-14

X1-15

X1-11

BP

MARK

FBC

FAA



10.2.6. ATU-IL01/IL03/IL04/IL13


X1-2

X1-4

X4-2

X4-1X4-3

X4-4

X3-2

X3-1X3-4

X3-3

X2-2

X2-1

X2-4

X2-3

X1-1

X1-3

BB

BP

MARK

FBC

The first identifier of the straps (1... 4) indicates the ATU circuit 0 ... 3.For all circuits the following applies:- X . -1 : installed : Long Line Outgoing

not installed : Short Line Outgoing- X . -2 : installed : Long Line Incoming

not installed : Short Line Incoming- X . -3 : may never be installed- X . -4 : may never be installed



10.2.7. ATU-IL23

To make the software program neutral with respect to the external ATU-IL side, strapsX1-1 (3,5,7) and X1-2 (4,6,8) adapt the attenuation of the transmission paths to the 'shortline' or 'long line' adjustment. See figure 10.2.7. for the strap positions.

There are a number of possibilities for the transmission paths which can be adjusted bypresence or absence of straps. These straps have the following meaning:

X1-1 (3,5,7) If positioned between 101 and 102:The outgoing direction (via the a/b wires) works in the 'long line'adjustment.

If positioned between 102 and 103:the outgoing direction works in the 'short line' adjustment.

X1-2 (4,6,8) If positioned between 101 and 102:The incoming direction (via the c/d wires) works in the 'long line'adjustment.

If positioned between 102 and 103:the incoming direction works in the 'short line' adjustment.

The ATU-IL23 mode of operation can be selected as follows:

Mode: X1-9 between: X1-10 between:

SSAC15-A 101-102 102-103SSAC15-D / CEPT-L1 102-103 102-103Selftest 101-102 101-102Factory test 102-103 101-102



Figure 10.2.7. Strap positions ATU-IL23.

101102103

X1-10X1-9

101X1-1 102

103

101X1-3 102

103

101X1-5 102

103

101X1-7 102

103

FBC

101X1-2 102

103

101X1-4 102

103

101X1-6 102

103

101X1-8 102

103

LEDs

BB

BPa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaaa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa



10.2.8. ATU-LB12

Figure 10.2.8. shows the straps for 50 Hz Ringing Current of the ATU-LB12.

Note: The straps are drawn in the position for 50 Hz ringing current; the undrawn positionis valid for 25 Hz ringing current.

Figure 10.2.8. Straps for 50 Hz Ringing Current ATU-LB12.

X1-1

X1-2

103

103

BU2

BU1

101

101

BP

BB

MARK

FBC



10.2.9. ATU-PSI

An ATU-PSI is an 8-wire interface which connects the ISPBX to a front door openingsystem or an emergency call signalling system. Distinction of both systems has to be madeby seven straps.

Though the ATU-PSI is not a trunk unit, the control corresponds to that of other ATUs. Forthis reason this type of PCT is yet classified to the ATUs. The abbreviation ATU-PSI refersto the Private Switching Interface function.

The door opening system enables a speech path via the front door intercom and opening ofthe front door. The procedure is as follows:

If the external door-bell button is pressed, a speech path to the door intercom can beestablished by dialling the ATU-PSI answering number from an extension. Pressing theenquiry button activates the ALC, fitted to the ATU-PSI for the external signalling, to sendringing current to the circuitry for external signalling. The front door will be opened by acontinuous or intermittent signal.

The emergency call signalling system can be dialled from an extension, effecting anacoustic alarm sounding continuously or intermittent. When the answering number of theATU-PSI is dialled, a speech path to the caller will be established and the alarm will beswitched off.

The continuous or intermittent signal, used for door opening or alarming, has been derivedfrom the ringing current rhythm. The pulse time, detected by the call detector, has beenextended by two delay circuits. One circuit lengthens the pulse time by 1,5 s for theintermittent signal, the other by at least 4 s for the continuous signal.

Note: All straps are drawn in the position for front door opener with intermittingm - contact after answering.

By means of seven straps discrimination is made between the front door opening systemand the emergency call signalling system, refer to figure 10.2.9. for positions. Care shouldbe taken that no other connections are made than mentioned below.

- For the front door opening system the following straps have to be fitted:. X1-1 between 101 and 201;. X1-1 between 103 and 203;. X1-1 between 104 and 204;. X1-1 between 106 and 206;. X1-2 between 105 and 106.




X1-1

101

106

BP

BB201

206

101

106

101

106

X1-2

MARK

FBC

A choice has to be made out of one of the four following manners of door opening (=operation of the M relay):

- M relay intermitting, only after answering via the intercom:. X1-2 between 101 and 102;. X1-2 between 103 and 104.

- M relay intermitting, regardless of answering:. X1-2 between 101 and 102;. X1-2 between 103 and 203.



- M relay continuously operating; only after answering via the intercom:. X1-2 between 101 and 201;. X1-2 between 103 and 104.

- M relay continuously operating, regardless of answering:. X1-2 between 101 and 201;. X1-2 between 103 and 203.

- For the emergency call signalling system the following straps have to be fitted:. X1-1 between 201 and 202;. X1-1 between 102 and 103;. X1-1 between 204 and 205;. X1-1 between 105 and 106;. X1-2 between 105 and 205;. X1-2 between 103 and 203.

A choice has to be made out of one of the two following manners of emergency callsignalling (= operation of the M relay):

- M relay intermitting: X1-2 between 101 and 102;. M relay continuously operating: X1-2 between 101 and 201.

Figure 10.2.10. shows the possible strappings for control of the speech path and the dooropener or acoustic alarm.

Figure 10.2.10. Straps X1-2 for The Speech Path and The External Signal.

201

203

205

102

101

103

104

106

105

I

Intermitting

Continuous

FLIP-FLOP

M-RELAY

ST-RELAY

ANDGATE



10.2.10. ATU-ST03

To adapt each of the four ATU-ST03 circuits to the 2-wire or 4-wire mode of operation thestraps has to be set according to table 10.2.10.In figures 10.2.11. and 10.2.12. the straps LKA ... LKK are given as A ... K; the prefixindicates the circuit number; e.g. strap 3.D indicates strap LKD of circuit 3.

Table 10.2.10. Settings for 2-wire or 4-wire mode .

STRAPS 2-WIRE MODE 4-WIRE MODE

LKA Absent PresentLKB Pin 1 & 2 Pin 2 & 3

LKC Pin 2 & 3 Pin 1 & 2

LKD Pin 2 & 3 Pin 1 & 2LKE Pin 1 & 2 Pin 2 & 3

LKF Present AbsentLKG Present AbsentLKH Absent/Present Absent/PresentLKJ Pin 1 & 2 Pin 2 & 3LKK Pin 1 & 2 Pin 2 & 3

The straps LKA ... LKK serve the following:

- LKA and LKB serve for the selection of DC signalling via the a and b wires (2-wire) or thea/b and c/d wires (4-wire).

- LKC and LKD select the source and terminating impedances.

- LKE selects the transformer DC current cancellation for 2-wire mode.

- LKF selects the duplexor circuit (hybrid) for the 2-wire mode.

- LKG selects the level adaptors for the 2-wire or 4-wire mode.

- LKJ and LKK serve for reversed connection of the polarized seizure detector, which isnecessary for correct functioning due to the cross connected a/b and c/d wires in the 4-wire mode.

- LKH determines whether the pads for an unamplified line are included or not in the 4-wiremode. For long line compensation or in case of an unamplified line the strap is absent,otherwise present.

In figures 10.2.11. and 10.2.12. the circuits are strapped for unamplified lines.



Figure 10.2.11. 2 - Wire Mode Strap Setting.

4.B

4.A

3.B

3.A

1.H

1.G

3.J 3.K

1.K

4.H4.G

1.A 1.B 1.J

2.B 2.A

4.E3.E

4.C 4.F 4.D4.K 4.J

2.C

2.E

2.F

2.G 2.H

3.G 3.H

1.C1.E 1.F

2.D

3.D

1.D

2.K 2.J

BB

3.C 3.F

MARK

FBC

BP



Figure 10.2.12. 4 - Wire Mode Strap Setting.

4.B

4.A

3.B

3.A

1.H

1.G

3.J 3.K

1.K

4.H4.G

1.A 1.B 1.J

2.B 2.A

4.E3.E

4.C 4.F 4.D4.K 4.J

2.C

2.E

2.F

2.G 2.H

3.G 3.H

1.C1.E 1.F

2.D

3.D

1.D

2.K 2.J

BB

3.C 3.F

MARK

FBC

BP



10.2.11. ATU-G

The Analogue Trunk Unit-General (ATU-G) can replace a number of ATUs with signallingtypes AS (=ALS70/EO), SS and PD. Additionally the ATU-G provides the metering andemer-gency switch-over functions and therefore it can replace a number of Metering Circuit(MC) and Metering Circuit-Emergency Switch-over Unit (MCE) boards.

Table 10.2.11. shows the existing ATU boards which can be replaced by the ATU-G andthe MC(E) functions the ATU-G provides when strapped as a certain ATU.

Table 10.2.11 Boards Replaced by ATU-G.

COUNTRY ATU REMARKS MC(E)

International AS01SS01PD11

A/D/F/G

Italy AS21SS01

Also combination possible:4×SS01 + 4×AS21

D

Belgium AS24SS04

Also combination possible:4×AS24 + 4×SS02

Extra Long Line adaptationincluded

F

Netherlands AS0BSS0B

Extra Long Line adaptationincluded

A

Switzerland AS2ESS0EPD2E

SS0E replaces the PD2E. D

There are 8 DIP switches (S1.1 ... S1.8) present, which can be used to select the requiredsignalling type and transmission plan; see table 10.2.12ab. When the DIP switches areused the information for initialisation of the ATU-G is loaded from a ROM on the board.

Note : For SSW 300 the required signalling type and transmission plan can also bedownloaded from the PPU. Then all 8 switches must be set to OFF.



1=ON; 0=OFF. Continued

Table 10.2.12a Settings for Signalling Type and Transmission Plan.

The metering range indicates the sensitivity of the metering circuit. MD1 = MeteringDetection - high sensitivity, Range 2 = Metering Detection - low sensitivity.

REMARKSTYPE OF

ATUMETERING SWITCH S1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Initialisation byPPU

- - - - - - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Belgium

ATU-SS04 no metering 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

ATU-SS04 16 kHz 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

ATU-AS24 no metering 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

4×AS24+4×SS04

16 kHz 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

Belgium-ELL


ATU-SS04 16 kHz 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0


4×SS04 +4×AS24

16 kHz 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

International


ATU-SS01 50 Hz MD1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

ATU-SS01 50 Hz MD2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

ATU-SS01 12 kHz MD1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

ATU-SS01 12 kHz MD2 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

ATU-SS01 16 kHz MD1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

ATU-SS01 16 kHz MD2 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

International


ATU-AS01 50 Hz MD1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

ATU-AS01 50 Hz MD2 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

ATU-AS01 16 kHz MD1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

ATU-AS01 16 kHz MD2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

International

ATU-PD11 no metering 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

ATU-PD11 50 Hz MD1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

ATU-PD11 50 Hz MD2 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

ATU-PD11 12 kHz MD1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

ATU-PD11 12 kHz MD2 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

ATU-PD11 16 kHz MD1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

ATU-PD11 16 kHz MD2 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0



1=ON; 0=OFF.

Table 10.2.12b Settings for Signalling Type and Transmission Plan.

The metering range indicates the sensitivity of the metering circuit. MD1 = MeteringDetection - high sensitivity, Range 2 = Metering Detection - low sensitivity.

REMARKSTYPE OF

ATUMETERING SWITCH S1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Initialisation byPPU

- - - - - - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Italy


ATU-SS01 12 kHz 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

8×AS21 no metering 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

8×AS21 12 kHz 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

4×SS01 +4×AS21

no metering 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0

4×SS01 +4×AS21

12 kHz 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

Netherlands

ATU-SS0B no metering 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

ATU-SS0B 50 Hz 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

ATU-AS0B no metering 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1

ATU-AS0B 50 Hz 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Netherlands-ELL

ATU-SS0B no metering 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0

ATU-SS0B 50 Hz 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1

ATU-AS0B no metering 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

ATU-AS0B 50 Hz 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

Switzerland

ATU-SS0E no metering 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1

ATU-SS0E 12 kHz 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

ATU-AS2E no metering 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1



Figure 10.2.13. DIP Switch Location ATU-G.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Factory testconnector

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

MARK

BB

FAD

S 1

FCA

Figure 10.2.14. Detail of DIP Switch S1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8OffOn

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a



Black indicates the position of the switch.



10.3. DIGITAL TRUNK UNITS

10.3.1. DTU-CA

The straps are used to connect the cable shields of the incoming and outgoing cable toground or to leave the cable shields floating.

The cable shields are grounded, when the straps are on the positions as shown in thediagram below.


FC 101

X1-1

203 201

103 101

BB

factorytest only

MARK

FBA

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaaa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa BP



10.3.2. DTU-PR

The straps are used to connect the cable shields of the incoming and outgoing cable toground or to leave the cable shields floating.The cable shields are grounded, when the straps are on the positions as shown in thediagram below.


FC 101

X1-1

203 201

103 101

BB

factorytest only

MARK

FBA

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaaa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa BP



10.3.3. DTU-PU

The Digital Trunk Unit for Primary Rate Universal (DTU-PU) can operate as a DTU-CA orDTU-PR. There are two versions of the DTU-PU: version 1 and version 2.

The DTU-PU carries a DIP switch block (S.1) and a group of eight straps (X1.1):

- S1. : The functions are given in table 10.3.2. (version 1) and table 10.3.3. (version 2).- X1.1 : Used to change the impedance of the transmission interface from 75 Ω to 120 Ω

and vice versa: see table 10.3.1.

Table 10.3.1. Strap Settings X1.1.

STRAP X1.1 DEFAULT SETTING CHANGE

101-201102-202 not placed: 120 Ω Outgoing placed: 75 Ω Outgoing

103-203104-204 not placed: 120 Ω Incoming placed: 75 Ω Incoming

105-205106-206 placed: 120 Ω Outgoing not placed: 75 Ω Outgoing

107-207108-208 placed: 120 Ω Incoming not placed: 75 Ω Incoming

The mode of operation (DTU-CA or PR) of the DTU-PU is selected as follows:

- Version 1:. DTU-CA : close switch S1.4 (enable the Channel Associated mode);. DTU-PR : open switch S1.4 (disable the Channel Associated mode).

- Version 2:. DTU-CA : close switch S1.4 (enable the Channel Associated mode) and

open switch S1.5 (disable the Common Channel mode);. DTU-PR : open switch S1.4 (disable the Channel Associated mode) and

open switch S1.5 (disable the Common Channel mode).

Note: The setting of the DIS-CRC switch (S1.5 for version 1 or S1.6 for version 2) dependson the ability of the destination to accept CRC4 (e.g. for APNSS the DIS-CRC switchshould be closed; the ACU does not accept CRC4).



*) means 'default setting'.

Table 10.3.2. DIP Switch Settings S1.1 ... S1.8 (DTU-PU version 1).

SWITCHSIGNALNAME

MEANING OPEN / OFF CLOSED / ON

S1.1 SH-BERDetermines if French BER detectionlevels (shift BER) are used.

Disable shift BER *) Enable shift BER

S1.2 EN-CLKDetermines if backpanel clockreference is to be used (always clocksignal at frontconnector).

No clock reference atback panel. *)

Clock also routed toback panel.

S1.3 SETLOOPOffers a remote test loop to the otherside (DTU input connected to DTUoutput).

Disable remote testloop. *)

Enable remote testloop.

S1.4 CA-MODEDetermines if DTU operates in thetransparent mode or in CA mode.

Disable ChannelAssociated Mode. *)

Enable ChannelAssociated Mode.

S1.5 DIS-CRCDetermines if 4 bit CRC check isused on bit 1 of TS0.

Enable CRC4. *) Disable CRC4.

S1.6 Isolation purpose. - -

S1.7 SH-OUTDetermines if outgoing transmissionshield is connected to ground.

Outgoing shield notconnected to GND.

Outgoing shield con-nected to GND. *)

S1.8 SH-INDetermines if incoming transmissionshield is connected to ground.

Incoming shield notconnected to GND.

Incoming shield con-nected to GND. *)


Table 10.3.3. DIP Switch Settings S1.1 ... S1.8 (DTU-PU version 2).

SWITCHSIGNALNAME


S1.1 SH-BERDetermines if French BER detectionlevels (shift BER) are used.

Disable shift BER *) Enable shift BER

S1.2 not used. - -

S1.3 SETLOOPOffers a remote test loop to the otherside (DTU input connected to DTUoutput).



S1.4 CA-MODEDetermines if DTU operates in thetransparent mode or in CA mode.

Disable ChannelAssociated Mode. *)

Enable ChannelAssociated Mode.

S1.5 CC-MODEDetermines if DTU operates in thetransparent mode or in CC mode.

Disable CommonChannel Mode. *)

Enable CommonChannel Mode.

S1.6 DIS-CRCDetermines if 4 bit CRC check isused on bit 1 of TS0.

Enable CRC4. *) Disable CRC4.

S1.7 SH-OUTDetermines if outgoing transmissionshield is connected to ground.



S1.8 SH-INDetermines if incoming transmissionshield is connected to ground.





Figure 10.3.3. Strap Location DTU-PU.

S 1 Front view

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FC 101BB

MARK

FCD

BA

X1.1

101201

108208

FC 1012

FC 1013

Fuse (250 mA)for connector FCD

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





On Offa a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a



10.3.4. DTU-PH

The Digital Trunk Unit-Protocol Handler (DTU-PH) converts an Integrated Networkingprotocol e.g. DPNSS1, DASS2 or 1TR6 into the Internal Message Protocol (IMP) and viceversa. The type of protocol that is handled is determined by the PROM package.The DTU-PH carries a DIP switch block (S1.2), a group of eight straps (X4.1) and a groupof five straps (X5.1).

- S1.2 : the functions are given in table 10.3.4.- X4.1 : used to change the impedance of the transmission interface from 75 Ohm to 120

Ohm and vice versa; see table 10.3.5.- X5.1 : used to select the EPROM type; see figure 10.3.6.


Table 10.3.4. DIL Switch Settings S1.2.1 ... S1.2.8.

SWITCHSIGNALNAME


S1.2.1SET-LP32

Offers a remote test loop to the otherside (DTU input connected to DTUoutput).



S1.2.2SET-LP31

Offers a local test loop (TS01 ... 31).Disable local testloop. *)

Enable local testloop.

S1.2.3CLK-REFB

Determines if backpanel clockreference is to be used (always clocksignal at frontconnector)

No clock reference atback panel. *)

Clock also routed toback panel.

S1.2.4 No function. - -S1.2.5 No function. - -S1.2.6 Isolation purpose. - -

S1.2.7 SH-OUTDetermines if outgoing transmis-sionshield is connected to ground.



S1.2.8 SH-INDetermines if incoming transmis-sionshield is connected to ground.



Table 10.3.5. Strap Settings X4.1.

STRAP X4.1 DEFAULT SETTING CHANGE

101-201 and 102-202 placed : 120 Ohm Outgoing not placed : 75 Ohm Outgoing

103-203 and 104-204 placed : 120 Ohm Incoming not placed : 75 Ohm Incoming

105-205 and 106-206 not placed : 120 Ohm Outgoing placed : 75 Ohm Outgoing

107-207 and 108-208 not placed : 120 Ohm Incoming placed : 75 Ohm Incoming



Figure 10.3.4. Strap Location DTU-PH (strapped for 120 Ohm and 1 Mb EPROM).

12345678

FC 1012

FC 1013

FC 1011 BB

MARK

Fuse (250 mA)for connector FCD

FBB

Factory testconnector

S 1.2a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaaa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

X4.1

101

108

201

208

X5.1

101

104

201

204

FCD

Figure 10.3.5. Detail of DIP Switch S1.2.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8OffOn





Figure 10.3.6. EPROM TypeSelection (strap X5.1).

X5.1 X5.1 X5.1

1 Mb EPROM(normal setting)

2 Mb EPROM 4 Mb EPROM



It is possible to change the DIP switch settings while the board is in service. However it isrecommended to put the board in 'not installed' (OM command SETNIN), change thesettings of S1.2 and put the board back in service again (OM command SETINS).

• Interface between DTU-PH and LTUThe interface between the DTU and the LTU comprises the following signals on frontconnector FBB:- TLI : Trunk Line Incoming- TLO : Trunk Line Outgoing

Figure 10.3.7. Layout Front Connector FBB.

109 309

FBB

116 316

TLI 120 Ohm

TLI 120 Ohm

SHIELD

TLI 75 Ohm

TLI 75 Ohm

GND

TLO 120 Ohm

TLO 120 Ohm

SHIELD

TLO 75 Ohm

TLO 75 Ohm

• Interface between DTU-PH and CRUThe interface between the DTU and the CRU comprises the following signal on frontconnector FC1011:- RCS : Reference Clock Signal (2,048 MHz)

The coaxial front connectors FC1012 and FC1013 are used to connect the 75 Ohm trunklines to the LTU. The connector at position FC1012 is the output of the transmissioninterface and the connector at position FC1013 is the input. Note that this input andoutput are also available at position FBB (TLI & TLO 75 Ohm).

• Interface between DTU-PH and NT1The interface between the DTU and NT1 multiplexing equipment comprises the -48Vsignal for power feeding to NT1 multiplexing equipment (fuse located above FCD, 250mA.

Figure 10.3.8. Layout Front Connector FCD.

101 301

FCD

108 308

GND

-48V

GND

-48V

GND

-48V

GND

-48V

GND

-48V

GND

-48V

GND

-48V

GND

-48V

To NT1 multiplexing equipment



10.3.5. DTU-BA

Depending on the network configuration the DTU-BA can operate either as a master or as aslave configuration in a network. If the DTU-BA is strapped as a Network Terminator (NT), itwill provide the synchronisation clock for the TE. If two DTU-BAs form one transmissionlink, one must be strapped as the NT and the other one as the TE. The maximumtransmission distance is 1000 meters. The strap settings used in factory for test purposesare not illustrated.

Figure 10.3.9. Strap Location DTU-BA.

103102101

103102101

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

BB

X4.1 X4.2

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











Strap settings for NT or TE mode.

StrapTerminalEquipment(slave)

NetworkTerminator(master)

RelatedPorts

Applies toConnector

X4.1 101-102 102-103012

FBAFBAFBA

X4.2 101-102 102-103

3456

FBAFBBFBBFBB

MARK

BP



10.3.6. DTX-I

The Digital Trunk eXtension-ISDN (DTX-I) provides 15 four-wire 2B+D accesses to theISPBX. Each access contains an S0-interface which can be configured as follows:

- as a network interface to connect ISDN terminal equipment;- as a trunk/tie line interface to make a connection to the ISDN.

The following S0-line interfaces are supported:

- an extension interface;- a remote extension interface;- an 1TR6 trunk line interface;- an 1TR6 tie line interface;- a DPNSS tie line interface.

The DTX-I can replace a DLC-I or DTU-BA, however the DLC-I or DTU-BA provide 7circuits only.

Note: There is also a stripped version of the DTX-I which provides 7 four-wire 2B+D S0-interfaces.

Each line of the DTX-I has two straps of 3 pins which connect the power supply to thecenter taps of the transmission line transformers for phantom power feeding purposes andfor the selection of master or slave, when used as a trunk connection; see figure 10.3.9.

Figure 10.3.10. Meaning of strap X5.1 ... X5.30.

101

-40V 102 Tn

NOT CONNECTED 103

101

SYSTEM GROUND 102 Rn

MASTER / SLAVE 103

RECEIVE

TRANSMIT

Rn : odd numbered straps

(X5.1 ... X5.29.)

Tn : even numbered straps

(X5.2 ... X5.30.)DTX-I



The strap at the receiver side has the reference Rn and at the transmit side Tn: R standsfor receiver, T for transmit and n is the related line number.

When the DTX-I is used as a DTU-BA, the DTU-BA can operate either as TerminalEquipment (TE) or as Network Terminator (NT) in a network. When changing over from TEto NT (or vice versa) also the projecting data has to be changed. Check the projecting datato see how the DTU-BA is projected.

• Strap SettingsWhen the DTX-I is used as a:

- DLC-I : both straps Rn and Tn must be placed on position 101&102 whenterminals, which require line power from the S0-interface, areconnected to the line.

- DTU-BA as TE : both straps Rn and Tn must be placed on position 102&103 whenthe line is used for trunk purposes; the trans-formers aredisconnected from the system ground and -40V.

- DTU-BA as NT : both straps Rn and Tn must be removed when the line is used fortrunk purposes; the transformers are disconnected from the systemground and -40V.

WARNING: Be sure that both the Rn and Tn straps of a line are mounted on equalpositions. It is not allowed to have one strap mounted on position 101&102and the other strap on position 102&103.DO NOT mount a strap on X2.1 and X3.1. This will damage the processor andpower supply.

• Terminal EquipmentWhen the DTX-I is used as interface to the PSTN or another PABX it operates as a TE.It expects to receive an external clock reference from an NT to synchronise with. Thismeans that a clock signal is available on frontconnector FC 101; this clock signal can beused as the input clock for a CRU, when necessary.

• Network TerminatorWhen the DTX-I is used as an NT, it operates as the master and it provides the syn-chronisation clock for the TE. This means that no clock signal is available on front-connector FC 101.

When two DTX-I (used as DTU-BAs) form one transmission link (max. distance 1000meters) one DTX-I must be strapped as DTU-BA NT and the other as a TE.



Figure 10.3.11. Strap Location on the DTX-I.

Lab/Factorytest only.

LINE 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

X5.2

X5.1X5.4

X5.3X5.6

X5.5X5.8

X5.7X5.10

X5.9X5.12

X5.11X5.14

X5.13X5.16

X5.15X5.18

X5.17X5.20

X5.19X5.22

X5.21X5.24

X5.23X5.26

X5.25X5.28

X5.27X5.30

X5.29

BP

MARK

BB

FAB

FBA

FBD

FCC

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaaa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

FC 101

101

102

X2.1

X3.1204104

201101

Figure 10.3.12. Details of strap X5.1 ... X5.30.

X5.2

X5.1

X5.4

X5.3etc.

103102101

103102101103102101

103102101

LINE 0

LINE 1



10.4. LINE TERMINATING UNIT

Figure 10.4.1. Front Layout of the LTU.

FCD

FCB

LTU

U A

U B

LB

LC

LA130 a a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaa

Means LED

Socket for connector with pre-set links

Means Connector Position

a a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaa

Connector in :Upper position=normal operationLower position=test loop

Connector in :Upper position=test loopLower position=normal operation



Figure 10.4.2. LTU Location on LTU Mounting Unit.

LTU MOUNTING UNIT

COMPONENT SIDE

LTU

Seefigure 4.4.

BA

BP

MARK

FCD

FCB



Figure 10.4.3. Straps to be soldered.

F

D EB

A

SOLDERING SIDEOF LTU

J K H

C

GSTATION CABLING

UNBALANCED 75 Ω

BALANCED 120 Ω

A - C and D - E F - H and J - K

A - B F - G

TRANSMIT SIDE

INPUT OUTPUT

STRAPS TO BE SOLDERED

Figure 10.4.4. Detail and Settings of U- links.

ALARM COMMAND

LOSS OF INPUT OR BINARY ERROR RATE > 10-3

BINARY ERROR RATE > 10-5

U 6

U 4

URGENTALARM

U 5

U 3

NON-URGENTALARM

BINARY ERROR RATE ALARM

TRANSFERRED TO DTU

NOT TRANSFERRED TO DTU

U 1

-

U-LINK INPOSITION

U 2

U 7

U-LINK INPOSITION

ALARM INDICATION SIGNAL TO BE DELIVERED

AT > 10-5 ALARM COMMAND

CONSTANTLY, INDEPENDENT OF AN ALARM COMMAND

U 7

U 5

U 2

U 4

U 6

U 3

U 1



10.5. KEY TELEPHONE LINE CIRCUIT

In this chapter two types of Key Telephone Line Circuits (KTLC) are discussed, the 8circuits per board versions and the 16 circuits per board version. The 8 circuits per boardKTLCs are:

- KTLC01 : according to transmission plan 01 (e.g. The Netherlands);- KTLC02 : according to transmission plan 02 (e.g. Germany);- KTLC03 : according to transmission plan 03 (e.g. United Kingdom).

The 16 circuits per board KTLC is:

- KTLC-E : transmission plan set by the signalling block.

The transmission plans supported by the KTLCs can be applied in a wide variety ofcountries next to the ones listed above.

10.5.1. KTLC01/02/03

Which KTLC board has to be used in a certain country depends on the local transmissionplan.

The transmission levels of the various KTLC01/02/03 boards are selected by means ofstrap settings. The location of the straps is given in figure 10.5.1. The function of the strapsis as follows:

• Strap X1.1The straps of X1.1 are used to set the mode of operation of the KTLC; see table 10.5.1.For normal operation of the key telephones, all straps of X1.1 must be installed.

Table 10.5.1. KTLC Mode of Operation.

MODE OF OPERATIONX1.1

101-201 102-202 103-203 104-204 105-205

Normal Operational Mode (strapped in factory) Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.

Debug Test Mode Inst. Inst. - Inst. Inst.

Terminal Communications Test - Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.

Loopback Test: Control - to Terminal Processor - Inst. - Inst. Inst.

Loopback Test: Control Processor to PPU - - Inst. Inst. Inst.



• Strap X2.1This strap is used to connect or disconnect the back-up battery of the memory circuits onthe KTLC board. Within SSW 300 systems the backup voltage is supplied through thebackpanel. Therefore, this strap should always be removed with these systems. Userdefined data is not retained when the board is removed from the system.

- Normal operation: strap on position 102-103.

• Strap X3.1The straps of X3.1 are used to select the correct transmission levels; the setting of X3.1depends on the type of KTLC and the local transmission plan.Table 10.5.2. gives the strap settings for the KTLC input levels; table 10.5.3. gives thesettings for the KTLC output levels.

Both tables indicate the strap settings per transmission plan for the most commoncountries. Use the default setting in case of other countries.

Note: Make sure that the strap settings of X3.1 correspond to the local transmissionplan before installing the board.

• Strap Settings of the Input and Output Levels

Table 10.5.2. KTLC input Levels.

KTLC INPUT LEVEL (dBr)

KTLC01 KTLC02 KTLC03

X3.1

101-201 102-202 103-203 104-204

- 8.4 *) - 7.6 *) - 2.8 *) - - - -- 6.9 - 6.2 - 1.3 - - - Inst.- 5.4 - 4.6 0.2 - - Inst. -- 3.9 - 3.2 1.7 - - Inst. Inst.- 2.4 - 1.5 3.2 5) - Inst. - -- 0.9 1) 0.0 4) 4.7 - Inst. - Inst.

0.6 2) 1.5 6.2 - Inst. Inst. -2.1 3) 2.9 7.7 - Inst. Inst. Inst.3.6 4.5 9.2 Inst. - - -5.1 4.5 10.7 Inst. - - Inst.6.6 6.0 12.2 Inst. - Inst. -8.1 7.5 13.7 Inst. - Inst. Inst.9.6 9.0 15.2 Inst. Inst. - -

11.1 12.0 16.7 Inst. Inst. - Inst.12.6 13.5 18.2 Inst. Inst. Inst. -14.1 15.0 19.7 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.



Table 10.5.3. KTLC Output Levels.

KTLC OUTPUT LEVEL (dBr)

KTLC01 KTLC02 KTLC03

X3.1

105-205 106-206 107-207 108-208

7.8 *) 2.0 *) 2.2 *) - - - -6.3 0.5 0.7 - - - Inst.4.8 -1.1 - 0.8 - - Inst. -3.3 -2.6 - 2.3 - - Inst. Inst.1.8 -4.1 - 3.8 - Inst. - -0.3 -5.5 - 5.3 - Inst. - Inst.

- 1.2 -7.1 4) - 6.8 - Inst. Inst. -- 2.7 2) -8.5 - 8.3 5) - Inst. Inst. Inst.- 4.2 3) -10.1 - 9.8 Inst. - - -- 5.7 -11.6 - 11.3 Inst. - - Inst.- 7.2 1) -13.1 - 12.8 Inst. - Inst. -- 8.7 -14.6 - 14.3 Inst. - Inst. Inst.

- 10.2 -16.1 - 15.8 Inst. Inst. - -- 11.7 -17.6 - 17.3 Inst. Inst. - Inst.- 13.2 -19.1 - 18.8 Inst. Inst. Inst. -- 14.7 -20.6 - 20.3 Inst. Inst. Inst. Inst.

Note 1: *) Factory setting.1) Belgium.2) Italy.3) The Netherlands.4) Germany.5) United Kingdom.

Note 2: DefaultsKTLC01 : The Netherlands.KTLC02 : Germany.KTLC03 : United Kingdom.



Figure 10.5.1. Strap and Fuse Locations of the KTLC 01/02/03 board.

Fuse per line=0.2A Slow blow

F1.1

201

205

X 1.1

X 3.1

105

101

108208

101201

MARK

FBA

FBD

103 101

X2-1

F1.2

F1.3

F1.4

F1.5

F1.6

F1.7

F1.8

BP

BB



10.5.2. KTLC-A/E

The KTLC-A is a 8 circuit board, consisting of one (mother) board. KTLC-A is delivered withan on-board memory backup battery. Because the system supplies the RAM backupvoltage (EBU) via the back panel, be sure the on-board battery is removed. Leaving thebattery connected will damage the battery (battery disconnected).

The KTLC-E is a 16 circuit board and is a combination of the KTLC-A (mother board) and adaughter board. KTLC-E does not have an on-board memory backup battery, because thesystem supplies the RAM backup voltage (EBU) via the back panel. Be sure the batterystrap settings are in the correct position. The battery cannot be fitted onto the mother-boardif used as a KTLC-E.

When using the KTLC-A/E in SSW 300 systems, the battery should not be connected. Seetable 10.5.5. for strap settings.

The KTLC-A and KTLC-E have electronic 'automatic recovery' fuses, so no replaceblefuses are used.

The location of the strap settings are given in figure 10.5.2. These straps are used forfactory testing and should for normal operation be in the following position:

- Strap X2.1 : Not placed (back-up battery disconnected);- Strap X2.2 : Placed (watchdog active);- Strap X3.1 : Configured as KTLC-A : Only strap 101-201 is not placed, other straps

are placed (table 10.5.5.).Configured as KTLC-E : All placed;

The transmission plan and the transmission levels are set by the software in the signallingblock. Refer to the Signalling Data Manual for further details concerning the meaning andpossible settings of the signalling group bytes. Refer to the PE Commands Manual fordetails related to 'variable signalling data'. In that section of the PE Commands Manual theprocedures are given for adapting the signalling group bytes to the local requirements. Thedefault value for the KTLC-E signalling block is transmission plan 01, since it is usedeverywhere except Germany and Austria.

The transmission characteristics are downloaded to the KTLC-A/E when the board isstarted up, ie, during a warm start. These characteristics are determined by the signallingdata block which, for a KTLC-A/E, is 2305. Some of these bytes may need to be changed toadapt to the local transmission plan. This is done by using PE command 4400. For the sake of completeness the bytes of signalling block 2305 are given here. For theinformation related to the signalling blocks is referred to the Signalling Data Manual.



Table 10.5.4. Impedance Types.

BOARD PLAN IMPEDANCE

KTLC-A01 01 UK Line +600 R

KTLC-A02 02 German Complex

KTLC-E01 01 UK Line +600 R

KTLC-E02 02 German Complex

• Software Compatibility BytesBytes 1 and 2 are the Software Compatibility bytes. The contents of these bytes aresuitable for all allowed terminals and should not be altered.

• Transmission CharacteristicsBytes 3 and 4 are used for setting the transmit and receive gains for the localtransmission plan.

The KTLC-A/E combination is available in 2 impedance types to suit the differenttransmission plans. See table 10.5.4.

As said, the transmit and receive levels are set by bytes 3 and 4. The contents of thesebytes can be changed to suit the local requirements by PE command 4400.

• Hybrid Balance and Side ToneBytes 5, 6 and 7 are used for setting the hybrid balance. At present no standards aredefined, refer to the signalling data manual for details of the various possibilities.

• Language VersionByte 8 sets the default language version. It is not used by the KTLC-A/E. It canNOT bechanged by using PE command 4400.

Table 10.5.5. KTLC-A/E Strap settings.

BOARD STRAP X2.1 STRAP X2.2 STRAP X3.1

KTLC-ANot placed,

battery disconnected.Placed.

Strap 201-101 only not placed, other strapsare placed.

KTLC-ENot placed,

battery disconnected.Placed. All placed.



Figure 10.5.2. Strap Locations on the KTLC-A/E Motherboard.

101201

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

102

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

101

X2-2a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

101102

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

X2-1

MARK

FBA

FBD

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaaa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

106206

X 3.1

BP

BBStrap 201-101 not placed if

configured as KTLC-A,

placed if configured as KTLC-E.



10.6. METERING CIRCUIT AND SWITCH OVER UNIT

The Metering Circuit (MC) is used to detect the metering pulses from the public exchangeand to pass the metering information on via the Analogue Trunk Unit (ATU) to thePeripheral Control.The metering circuits are also available in combination with the Emergency Switch overUnits, the so called MCE boards.

10.6.1. MC(E)-D

The MC(E)-D (16 circuit version) is used to detect the 12 kHz metering pulses sent by thepublic exchange.The sensitivity of the MC(E)-D board can be selected (using strap X3.1) to match theelectrical specifications of the metering pulses as defined by the local PTT; see table10.6.1. and figure 10.6.1.

Table 10.6.1. Strap Settings MC(E)-D.

STRAP X3.1 LEVEL (mV)

101-201 35

102-202 55

103-203 70

104-204 100

10.6.2. MC(E)-F

The MC(E)-F board contains 16 metering detection circuits to detect the 16 kHz meteringpulses sent by the public exchange.The sensitivity of the MC(E)-F board can be selected (using strap X3.1) to match theelectrical specifications of the metering pulses as defined by the local PTT; see table10.6.2. and figure 10.6.1.

Table 10.6.2. Strap Settings MC(E)-F.

STRAP X3.1 LEVEL (mV)

101-201 46

102-202 75

103-203 not used

104-204 not used



10.6.3. MC(E)-G

The MC(E)-G (16 circuit version) is used to detect the 12 kHz metering pulses sent by thepublic exchange.

The sensitivity of the MC(E)-G board can be selected (using strap X3.1) to match theelectrical specifications of the metering pulses as defined by the local PTT; see table10.6.3. and figure 10.6.1.

Table 10.6.3. Strap settings MC(E)-G.

STRAP X3.1

SENSITIVITY (mV)

Open circuitTerminated

circuit (240 Ohms)

101-201 50 25102-202 110 55103-203 140 70

104-204 200 100



Figure 10.6.1. Strap Location on the MC(E)-D, MC(E)-F and MC(E)-G.

FAA

FAB

FAC

FAD

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

MARK

X 3.1

204 201

101104

BB

BP



10.7. MODEM LINE UNIT

On an MLU card the following switches and jumper pads are present (see figure 10.7.2.):- 8 DIL switches (S1.1... S1.8.), each comprising 8 positions;- 8 jumper pads (X1.1... X1.8.) for 2 or 4 wire selection;- 4 jumper pads (X2.1... X2.4.) for the selection of the detection level.

Figure 10.7.2. Location of DIL Switches and Jumper Pads.

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

S1.6 S1.7 S1.8S1.5

S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4

X2.1

X2.2

X2.3

X2.4

X1.4

X1.5

X1.6

X1.7

X1.8

X1.1

X1.2

X1.3

MARK

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaaa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

BB

BP



For each of the four MLU channels 2 switches and 2 jumper pads are reserved.

Selection of modem and configuration parameters are done via the DIL switches.

Selection of 2 or 4 wire use is done via the jumper pads.

10.7.1. DIL Switches

Per MLU channel the following DIL switches are reserved:

- Channel 0 : S1.3 and S1.4;- Channel 1 : S1.1 and S1.2;- Channel 2 : S1.7 and S1.8;- Channel 3 : S1.5 and S1.6.

The DIL switches for one MLU channel are arranged according figure 10.7.2.Switches 13...16 are reserved for future extensions.

Figure 10.7.2. DIL Switches for One MLU Channel.

On

Off

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a


a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a


a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a


a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a


a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a


a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a aa a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

For setting the specific parameters like transmission speed, synchronous or asynchronousdata transfer etc. for each MLU channel, consult figure 10.7.1. and 10.7.2. and follow theflow diagram in figure 10.7.3.

Note: Some Modem types require a delayed operation of CT108; this can be selected bysetting switch 12 ON.



Figure 10.7.3. Setting the DIL-switches for One MLU Channel.

CT 106 orCT 109 = V25

answer

Answertone = 2100 Hz

MODEMsends V.25calling tone

MODEMsends V.25answer tone

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

S8 = offS8 = onS5 = onSpeed S1 S2 S3 S4

600 on off off off1200 off on off off2400 on on off off4800 on off on off9600 on on on off

19200 on on off on38400 off off on on48000 on off on on56000 off on on on64000 on on on on

MLUDIP-switches

Synchronous

Leasedline

S7 = off

S10 = off

S9 = off

S11 = on

S9 = on S6 = off 2225HzS6 = on

S9 = on S10 = on

S11 = off

Legend

CT 106 - V24 signal CTS

CT 109 - V24 signal DCD

S7 = on

END



10.7.2. 2/4 Wire Selection

Per MLU channel the following jumper pads are reserved:

- Channel 0 : X1.1 and X1.2;- Channel 1 : X1.3 and X1.4;- Channel 2 : X1.5 and X1.6;- Channel 3 : X1.7 and X1.8.

Both jumpers for one MLU channel should not be set into the same direction.

- 2 wire selection (see also figure 10.7.4a.):X1.1, X1.3, X1.5 and X1.7 jumper placed on left hand pins.X1.2, X1.4, X1.6 and X1.8 jumper placed on right hand pins.

- 4 wire selection (see also figure 10.7.4b.):X1.1, X1.3, X1.5 and X1.7 jumper placed on right hand pins.X1.2, X1.4, X1.6 and X1.8 jumper placed on left hand pins.

X1.1

X1.2

X1.3

X1.4

X1.5

X1.6

X1.7

X1.8

X1.1

X1.2

X1.3

X1.4

X1.5

X1.6

X1.7

X1.8

Figure 10.7.4a. 2 - Wire Selection. Figure 10.7.4b. 4 - Wire Selection.



10.7.3. Detection Levels (Answertone)

The detection levels are adjustable per MLU channel.The following jumper pads are reserved:

- Channel 0 : X2.1;- Channel 1 : X2.2;- Channel 2 : X2.3;- Channel 3 : X2.4.

Jumper placed on top pins : detection level = -25 dBr;Jumper placed on middle pins : detection level = -28 dBr;Jumper placed on bottom pins : detection level = -31 dBr.



10.8. DIGITAL LINE CIRCUITS

10.8.1. DLC-I

The Digital Line Circuit-ISDN (DLC-I) provides seven digital 2B+D lines to the ISPBX.These lines are four wire basic rate S0-interfaces between the ISPBX and ISDN terminalequipment according to CCITT Rec. I.430.

The DLC-I is used as Network Terminator (NT): it operates as the master and it providesthe synchronisation clock for the Terminal Equipment (TE). Therefore straps X4.1 and X4.2must be placed on positions 102-103.

The maximum transmission distance is 1000 meters. The strap settings used in factory fortest purposes are not illustrated.



Figure 10.8.1. Strap Location DLC-I.

X4.2

103102101

X4.1

103102101

factorytest only

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

BB

MARK

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaaa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a










a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aStrap settings for DLC-I.

StrapNetwork

Terminator(master)

RelatedPorts

RelatedCircuits

X4.1 102-103 4...6 10...15

X4.2 102-103 0...3 2...9



11. CONNECTION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

Apart from the commonly used impulse telephone sets or keytone telephone sets it ispossible to connect various other devices to a SOPHO ISPBX like:

- Digital telephone sets, the SOPHO-SETs;- Line Adapter Modules, the LAMs;- Private Network Termination 1, the PNT1;- A SOPHO SystemManager (SSM);- An Analogue Operator Position, the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 50;- A Digital Operator Position, the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30.

In this chapter the necessary OM and PE procedures are described to connect one of theabove mentioned devices to an ISPBX.

11.1. PREPARATION OF THE DLC FOR A SOPHO-SET OR LAM

A SOPHO-SET is a digital voice/data terminal that can be directly connected to a DigitalLine Interface Card (DLC) in the Peripheral Module by means of a single twisted wire pairtelephone line.

A Line Adaptor Module (LAM) is a Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) for interfacingtwo sets of Data Termination Equipment (DTE) with the ISPBX. The LAM can be directlyconnected to a Digital Line Interface Card (DLC) in the Peripheral Module by means of asingle twisted pair telephone line.

There are three types of DLC boards: DLC-C, DLC-D and DLC-U.

- A DLC-C board contains the control circuitry for one DLC-D.- At the extension interface side the DLC-U is downwards compatible with DLC-C/D and

LDC combination, at the system side it is not compatible with the mentioned DLCs. DLC-U is available in two versions: 15 x (2B+D) channels and 7 x (2B+D) channels.

For the connection of SOPHO-SETs or LAMs to the ISPBX the following general rulesapply:

- Check the Project Engineering (PE) data;- Check the wiring;- Select a suitable site to locate the SOPHO-SET or LAM:

. Near to AC power outlet for LAM, also in case of a mains powered SOPHO-SET;

. Near to a telephone line socket;

. Close to the DTE for convenient connection of the interface cable;

. Isolated from sources of electromagnetic interference.



Note: Use a power source that is free from noise and excessive voltage fluctuations.

For detailed information concerning the SOPHO-SET and LAM installation, OM commandsand installation of DLCs reference is made to the following documentation:

- The SOPHO-SET Customer Engineer Manual;- The LAM Customer Engineer Manual;- The OM Commands Manual (MML);- The System Manager's Guide to OM;- The PE Commands Manual.

The following three possibilities exist:

- A DLC board is projected and physically present.Check if the status is INS (IN Service); if necessary change the status to INS.In case of a DLC-D board the controlling DLC-C board must also be present and INS.

- A DLC board is projected and not physically present.Consult the Office Data Manual (ODM) to find the board position where the DLC board isto be placed. Install the DLC board(s) in the appropriate position(s) and change thestatus to INS, by OM command SETINS (7010).

- No DLC board is projected; it has to be assigned manually, see section 11.1.1.

11.1.1. Manual Assignment of DLC

When the DLC board is not projected the board has to be assigned manually; the followingprocedures should be executed.

1. Add a DLC board to the PE data in a running system, with aid of ”Modifications ofsystem data in an operational system”,“PROJPA:4000, PCT type 02”.

2. Perform a warmstart with aid of OM command ”WARMST:” (9100).

3. Set the DLC board and circuit in service with OM for Circuit Conditions, if not alreadyset by PE data.The status of the DLC circuits remains INS when the SET/LAM is properly connected;the status is ABL when the SET/LAM is absent or not properly connected.

4. Assign the DNR of the SET/LAM to the EHWA with OM command ”CHDNRC” (3000).

5. Connect the SET/LAM to the telephone line socket.



6. Connect one or two Data Termination Equipment (DTE) to the SET/LAM.

Notes: 1. If modems are required in a connection, the following OM procedures have tobe executed too:- CHDTED (1210), if a standard set-up for the DTE parameters of the

SETs/LAMs in a usergroup is required, these parametersare defined here;

- CHMLUR (1230), defines the modem pool number and modem number thathas to be used when a specified (originating) user groupis connected to a specified (terminating) user group;

- CHMLUP (1240), defines the relation between a modem and its EHWA.

2. If a data connection has to be made through a DPNSS link, the following OMprocedure has to be executed too:- CHSICD (1220), defines the Service Indicator Code for a user group as

used with the DPNSS protocol.

11.1.2. Malfunctioning of the DLC

It is possible that the status transition from ABL to INS of the DLC circuit does not function.In that case the following actions has to be taken:

1. Check if the SOPHO-SET/LAM is properly connected to the power supply.

2. In case SOPHO-LAM308 or SOPHO-SET308: Check if the a-b wires are crossed.

11.2. SOPHO SystemManager

A SOPHO SystemManager (SSM) offers facilities for communication management andinformation retrieval. It is designed to optimize the use of a telephone exchange for abusiness or hotel. Some services can be provided by just dialling codes, others byrequesting them at an SSM workstation.

An SSM workstation will always comprise a monitor and a keyboard. The monitor showsthe services available, indicates where to enter data and displays it on request. Thekeyboard enables a user to communicate with the SSM; some keys have a specialmeaning.

A printer will usually be shared by a number of workstations. The printer provides a printoutof information such as telephone costs, the details of any particular call made, which roomsare available etc. Some printouts are automatically generated, e.g. a wake up alarm when aguest does not respond to a wake up call, a telephone bill when checking out a guest.



The SSM is connected to the CPU board of the ISPBX. Before connecting the SSM to theISPBX the following general rules apply:

- Check the ISPBX project engineering data;

In section 11.3. the concerning maintenance actions are described.For detailed information concerning the SSM installation and OM commands reference ismade to the following documentation:

- The SSM Cusomer Engineer Manual;- The System Manager's Guide;- The PE Commands Manual;- The Facility Implementation Manual (Management Facilities);

11.2.1. SOPHO SystemManager Configurations

The SSM is a separate computer system connected to the ISPBX via one or more V.24links. Via these links the computer system can communicate with the CPU of the ISPBXand a number of management functions can be transferred between the ISPBX and theSSM.

A number of facilities, available for ISPBX extensions are supported. The SSM can co-operate with one or more SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 50(E)s when using a common namedirectory database.

There are two ways of connecting the SSM to the CPU of SSW 300 systems:

- If only the Accounting Manager is used, the connection can be made to the so-calledprinter output of the CPU board. This CPU port is then adapted for local toll ticketingoutput and switched on by OM command 1050 (serial output). The default baud rate is2400.

- If other management modules of the SSM are used, as well as the Accounting Manager,the connection is made to a CPU port which has been assigned to the SSM, either localor remote. The default baud rate is 9600.

The first type of connection might be used in heavily loaded SSM configurations where it isnecessary to use a dedicated TT line for call accounting. As this is seldom the case withSSW 300 systems, the first method of connection has no advantages over the secondmethod, it is recommended that the second method is always used. See figure 11.1.



Figure 11.1. SOPHO SystemManager connected to ISPBX.

SOPHO

SystemManager

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

ISPBX(SSW 300)

ALC

System Console

Printer

User

User

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 50(E)

AOC

HOST

SSM port

See chapter 9.

CPU

The SSM software is divided into modules that can be ordered separately. Each modulehas a special function. Some services that are related to the installed modules can beinvoked by dialling the related SSM-prefixes (projectable) from an ISPBX extension. Otherservices must be requested from the SSM workstation.

For the basic configuration of the SSM two options are available:

- PC platform : CDOS Operating System;- UNIX platform : UNIX Operating System.



11.2.2. SOPHO SystemManager Modules

Table 11.1. gives an overview of the various SSM models.

1) One additional extension licence of 150 is possible.2) The SSM 5000 system has a theoretical limitation of 20,000 extensions (DNRs), but the practical

limitation is lower due to performance limitations. 3) Option in the Accounting Manager.4) Q-manager is specially designed for ISPBXs which use SSW 300.20 and upwards.

Table 11.1. SOPHO SystemManager Models.

MODEL

SOPHO SystemManagerPC (SINGLE USER)

150 600

SOPHO SystemManagerUNIX (MULTI USER)

1000 5000

Users 1 1 max. 12 max. 12

Extensions 150 1) 600 1000 20,000 2)

OperatingSystem

CDOS/386 CDOS/386 UNIX UNIX

BasicSoftware

SSM Managerfor CDOS

SSM Managerfor CDOS

SSM Managerfor UNIX

SSM Managerfor UNIX

ApplicationModules

Fixed modules:

- SSM Manager,- Accounting

Manager,- Call Manager,- Hotel Manager,

and FacilityManager.

All, except theFile Manager,PerformanceManager & FaultManager.

Modules notrelevant:

- Peripheral FaciltyManager;

- Access manager.

All except thefollowing which arenot relevant:

- File manager;- Peripheral Facilty

Manager;- Access Manager.

All except thefollowing which arenot relevant:

- File Manager;- Peripheral Facilty

Manager;- Access Manager.

Q-Manager4) yes yes no no

Call Statistics3) no yes yes yes

Multi-SiteSSM

no no no yes

The basic configurations contain the following functions:

- A database with three directories (internal, external, guest);- An extension database with the organisational structure;- The management and access control facilities of the system itself.



11.2.3. PE and OM Procedures Related to the Management Functions and SSM

In this section a survey is given of the PE and OM procedures related to the ManagementFunctions and SSM configuration. For examples refer to the Facility Implementation Manual(Management Facilities).

• Survey of Project Engineering ProceduresPE 2004 Are metering pulses received during operator call setup for the extension's

accountPE 2005 Define if metering pulses have to be stored in both operator and individual

extension buffer in case of operator meteringPE 2020 Define if Management Functions is used (SSW 300.10 only)PE 2021 Define if the Q-Manager is used on a stand alone PC or a SOPHO-

SUPERVISOR 50 E (SSW 300.20 only).PE 2027 Define if external control of service display is requiredPE 2033 Define if Management Functions is used for SSM servicesPE 2035 Define the numbering schemePE 2036 Define the toll ticketing outputPE 2390 Define the automatic repeat time for SSM servicesPE 2394 Define the SSM ringing time APE 2395 Define the SSM connecting time APE 2396 Define the SSM ringing time BPE 2397 Define the SSM connecting time BPE 2437 Define the SSM ring current rhythm APE 2438 Define the SSM ring current rhythm B

PE 3500 Define the device allowance level for OM proceduresPE 3510 Define the device allowance level for facility class assignmentPE 3520 Define the device allowance level for traffic class assignment

PE 4020 Define hardware addresses with special signalling groupPE 4130 Define the use of special ALCs

PE 5022 Define if tax metering pulses are available on the routePE 5028 Define toll ticketing activation pointPE 5053 Define toll ticketing treshold time in secondsPE 5054 Define toll ticketing metering pulses treshold value

PE 6095 sequence=080: Define the prefix for Room Status diallingPE 6095 sequence=081: Define the prefix for Night Watchman dialling PE 6095 sequence=082: Define the prefix for Automatic Message Entry diallingPE 6095 sequence=083: Define the prefix to upgrade traffic classPE 6095 sequence=084: Define the prefix to downgrade traffic classPE 6095 sequence=085: Define the prefix to activate message waiting



PE 6095 sequence=086: Define the prefix to deactivate message waiting

• Survey of OM ProceduresOM ASGNTT (1050) Start/Stop dumping toll ticketing messagesOM ASBAUD (1061) Set baud rateOM ASPORT (1063) Assign port to application (SSW 300.20)OM CHTTCR (1080) Define toll ticketing output format options

OM SEDATI (2100) Set Date and TimeOM CHFATI (2110) Change facility timingOM ASPORE (3400) Assign/Erase relation between Port-id, Port-type and Port type

addressOM ASDARE (3410) Assign data related to a service

OM CHTRFD (3027) Assign traffic classes to DNROM ACFACM (3030) Assign facility class marks OM ASPINP (3430) Set properties of input parameters

11.3. INSTALLATION OF THE SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30

11.3.1 Hardware Installation of the SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30

The SOPHO-SUPERVISOR 30 (SSV30) has a 2-wire interface and it is connected to theISPBX by means of a standard 4-wire cable, which provides a full duplex 2B + D interface.It is on the ISPBX side connected to a standard DLC-U, DLC-C/D and LDC boardcombination, or to the Digital Operator Card (DOC) located on the PMC board.

The DOC or the LDC supply the power for the SSV30.

The maximum number of SSV30s is eight. This means that one SSV30 is connected to theDOC and the rest to a DLC/LDC combination. Max. number of SSV30s on one DLC is 3. Indiagram 420 is shown how the DLC and LDC should be interconnected.

Figure 11.2. SSV30 with a DOC .

CPU SSV30PMC

PPU DOC



* LDC not required when using a DLC-U.

Figure 11.3. SSV30 with a DLC-U or DLC-C/D - LDC Combination.

CPU SSV30PMC DLC-C/D

or

DLC-U

LDC *

PPU

11.3.2. Projecting the SSV30 on a DOC

The SSV30 can be connected to a DOC, a board that is mounted on the PMC.

The Operator Circuit (OCT) has a different signalling group with respect to the other PMCcircuits. This means that the OCT has to be defined with PROJPA 4020 instead of 4000.

• Specify the Operator Circuit

PROJPA:4020,<EHWA>,,01,2807;

EHWA : External HardWare Address:10710 or 30710 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOPHO iS3030

11.3.3. Projecting the SSV30 Connected to a DLC

If the SSV30 is connected to a DLC port, in PROJPA 4020 a signalling group must beassigned to the EHWA of this DLC port.

• Specify the Operator Circuit

PROJPA:4020,<EHWA>,,01,<SIG-GROUP>;

EHWA : External HardWare Address of the SSV30 B-channel (the lasttwo digits of this address must be even!)

SIG-GROUP : Signalling Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2807 for DLC-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2808 for DLC-D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 090C for DLC-U



11.3.4. The SSV30 Password Mode

With OM command ASPSWD (3139) a password can be (re-)assigned to a USIN or a DNR.

• Assign Password to DNR or USIN

ASPSWD:<DNR or USIN>,<PASSWORD>

DNR or USIN : DNR of the SSV30 or the Identity Number of the userPASSWORD : Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2...12 digits)

11.3.5 The Projecting of Download Information

The transmission levels are software adjustable. This applies for the transmit, receive andside tone levels in softspeaking mode of operation and for transmit and receive levels inhandsfree mode of operation. The values are downloaded from the ISPBX.Also by means of downloading the ISPBX determines if the loudspeaking and/or handsfreemode of operation is allowed or not.

Next to this, the default language of the SSV30 can be chosen with the help of a projectingparameter.

11.3.5.1. Projecting Transmission Characteristics

The transmission levels of the SSV30 can be adjusted with projecting parameters. This isdone with PROJPA 4400 (Define Variable Byte Items).

• Specify the Transmission Characteristics

PROJPA:4400,<SIG-GROUP>,<BYTE-NO>,<BYTE-VAL>;


BYTE-NO : Byte Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see table 11.2.BYTE-VAL : Byte Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see table 11.2.

In table 11.2. is shown what the range is of a byte value belonging to a certain bytenumber.



Table 11.2. Byte Numbers and their Byte Value Range .

BYTE NUMBER DESCRIPTION BYTE VALUE RANGE

03 Transmit level Microphone 000...01504 Receive Level Telephone 000...01505 Side Tone Level 000...01506 Transmit Level Microphone Handsfree 000...015

016 (=handsfree not allowed)07 Receive Level Loudspeaker Handsfree 000...015

016...031 (=loudspeaking notallowed)

Table 11.3. shows the adjustable transmission levels belonging to a certain byte value.

Table 11.3. Transmission Levels.

BYTE VALUE TRANSMIT LEVEL (TL)(dBr)

RECEIVE LEVEL (RL)(dBr)

SIDE TONE (ST)(dB)

00 16.5 -21 -1801 18 -19.5 -1602 19.5 -18 -1403 21 -16.5 -1204 22.5 -15 -1005 24 -13.5 -806 25.5 -12 -607 27 -10.5 -408 28.5 -9 -209 30 -7.5 010 31.5 -6 211 33 -4.5 412 34.5 -3 613 36 -1.5 814 37.5 0 1015 39 1.5 12

With PROJPA 4401 the downloading of transmission characteristics must be enabled.

• Enable downloading of the Transmission Characteristics

PROJPA:4401,<SIG-GROUP>,02,1;




11.3.5.2. Steps for Changing the Default Language

The default language of the SSV30 is English. If necessary an other default languagesetting can be downloaded from the ISPBX and should therefore be projected.

• Specify the Default Language

PROJPA:4400,<SIG-GROUP>,08,<BYTE-VAL>;


BYTE-VAL : Byte Value:0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . English1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dutch2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . French3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . German

• Effectuate the Default Language

PROJPA:4401,<SIG-GROUP>,02,1;




12. DIAGNOSTIC TEST

The internal part of a SOPHO ISPBX is automatically tested with help of the SystemAssurance software.Apart from these automatic tests one can also manually initiate diagnostic tests. For the testof external lines a test telephone can be used. A description of the test procedures with atest telephone is included in this chapter.To test an analogue operator position a self-test program in this switch board can beactivated, a description of this procedure is included in this chapter. For the test of a digitaloperatorposition is referred to the documentation supplied with this type of switch board.

12.1. CHECKING EXTERNAL LINES WITH TEST TELEPHONE

The test telephone is an ordinary extension with the facility class mark "test call entitled". Itenables the following:

- Checking of the external lines;- Changing of traffic classes;- Switching off/on of MFC guarding time.

More than one extension can be assigned as a test telephone.For convenience a test telephone is normally located in the vicinity of the exchange.Test telephones can also be used as normal extensions.

12.1.1. General

The external line check is primarily a check on the correct operation of the interface with thedistant exchange, i.e. the line interface hardware part of the Trunk Unit, the line itself andline interface equipment at the distant exchange.

The check consists of:

- Dialling the test telephone prefix, which is acknowledged by internal dial tone.- Dialling the 5 digit hardware address code of the Trunk Unit to specify the required

external line:S BB PP

Circuit within boardPosition of Trunk Unit board in shelfShelf number



The Trunk Unit specified must be in one of the following service conditions:

00 - In Service, No Owner;01 - In Service, System Assurance2;02 - In Service, Call Processing.

When in 00 (idle), the system will respond with the relevant (Direct Dialling Out) dial tone.When in 01 or 02 (busy) the call is set in a waiting condition until the Trunk Unit becomesfree (service condition 00). During this period no tone is given. When the Trunk Unitbecomes free, the relevant DDO dial tone is given by the system.

The call is continued as an external call by dialling the digits to be transmitted over the line(within the limits imposed by the traffic class). In all cases, the traffic class assigned to the test telephone extension remains valid.Displaying or changing the traffic class is possible with OM procedures.

The test telephone prefix is fixed in the project data (PE parameter). The test telephoneextension number(s) can be assigned and changed by means of OM procedures.



12.1.2. Test Telephone Procedure

ACTION

Lift handset

Dial test telephone prefix

Dial hardware address code of required externalline circuit:

RESPONSE

Internal dial tone

Internal dial tone- NU tone indicates wrong prefix (or extension

does not have the test telephone facility classmark).

DDO dial tone

- No tone:Circuit is busy (INS-CP or INS-SAS2).Wait for DDO tone.Hold-on awaiting dial tone.

- Congestion tone:Replace handset, try again.

- Busy tone:Trunk Unit is in one of the followingconditions:

03 - INSSAS104 - INSOM1x - OUT . . .2x - ABL . . .

In case of OUT, check why.

In case of ABL, set the ATU to INS.

- NU tone:Non-existing Trunk Unit or address or circuitcondition is NIN.Check address.

Continue, by dialling required number e.g. forautomatic answering equipment in the PE or ownISPBX. (In the latter case another incoming trunkline is checked simultaneously.)

S BB PP

circuit within board

board position within shelf

shelf number

12.2. CHANGING OF TRAFFIC CLASSES WITH TEST TELEPHONE

The test telephone can be used as a traffic class switch for collectively lowering or raisingthe traffic class of extensions, e.g. from day class to night class and vice versa.



For this purpose two codes are laid down in the project data:

- One for lowering the traffic class;- One for raising the traffic class.

By means of the confirmation tone the system acknowledges that the change has takenplace.

12.3. SWITCHING OFF/ON OF MFC GUARD TIMER

The test telephone can also be used to switch off the Multi-Frequency Code (MFC) guardtimer, enabling the MFC units present in the ISPBX to be tested from the public exchange.The on/off state of the timer can be defined in the project data.

To this end a specific code is defined in the project data. Using a different code, which isalso laid down in the project data, the timer can be switched on again.

12.4. ANALOGUE OPERATOR POSITION SELF TEST

The test of the analogue Operator Position is done by means of an internal test program inthe analogue Operator Postition. This test program requires:

- An analogue Operator Postition;- An analogue Operator Postition test box.

This test program checks the following on the analogue Operator Postition:

- The keys;- The display;- The lamps;- The handset;- Data transmission path;- Buzzer (6 digit OP);

To test the analogue Operator Position, carry out the following steps.

Step Description/Action

1 Connect the test box between the analogue Operator Postition and the ISPBX.

2 If buffer sounds, press ZA.Response : Buzzer stops.




4 Remove the key, then put it back and turn it.

3 Press # and after that press "1" for a few seconds.Response : None.Remarks : Data transmission test. Failure indicated by continuous buzzer.

4 Press 2 for one second.Response : Buzzer sounds during pressing the button.Remarks : Buzzer test. If 2 is pressed the buzzer sounds.

5 Successively press keys 3 and 5.Remarks : Microphone switched on and telephone switched on.

6 Blow into microphone.Response : Blowing heard in telephone.

7 Successively press keys 4 and 5.Response : Microphone switched off.

8 Blow into microphone.Response : No response in telephone.

9 Successively press keys 6 and 3.Remarks : Microphone switched on. Telephone switched off.

10 Blow into microphone.Response : No response in telephone.

11 Remove the handset.

12 Press 7 and after that the Z key.Response : Alarm lamp extinguishes. Lamps and decimal points light in the

sequence given in figure 1.4.Remarks : If Z key pressed, test is suspended. If pressed again, test is

resumed.

13 Press the keys indicated in figure 1.5.Display : The responses should be as indicated.

14 Insert handset and turn key.




15 Remove the test box and reconnect the Operator Postition to the system. The MinorAlarm lamp should extinguish.

16 Turn key.

17 Repeat these procedures for each Operator Postition.

Figure 12.1. Test Box Connections.

PLUGPLUG

OPC

UART

OPERATORPOSITION

-48V OPGND

DIADIB

DOADOB

TATB

MAMB

48V Supply

-48V OPGND

TEST BOXAOC

MicrophoneMAMB

103 (111)*104 (112)*

MicrophoneTATB

101 (109)*102 (110)*

DOADOB

305 (313)*306 (314)*

DIADIB

303 (311)*304 (312)*

Data

Data

105 / 107 / 307(113 / 115 / 315) *106 / 108 / 308(114 / 116 / 316) *

48V DC

Data from 8048

Data to 8048

48V Supply

* Interfaces for second

operator position

Figure 12.2. Lamp Test Sequence.

232221171615

11

89

10

2728293031

383332262524201918141312765

34353637

1234

PBPAA3A2A1AMC MA UA

PBPA

W B1 B2 B3

Notes: If required, the microphone supply can be measured on the operator consolesocket (see figure 12.3.):- ON is 12 V between a and b (a = positive, b = ground).- OFF is 0 V (plug in the handset into the other socket to discharge the

capacitors).



Figure 12.3. Operator Position Socket.

EB

EB

a b

a

bMicrophone line

Telephone line



Figure 12.4. Key Test Sequence - 6 Digit Display.

DISPLAY CODESKEYPBPA

ACMUAWAM

Z (PRESS AGAIN TO CONTINUE)SKUWIZA

123456

7890*#

PAPBBLANKB1B2B3

VDSP (BLANK)OLE

HP CONTACT - LEFTHP CONTACT - RIGHT



12.5. TERMINATING THE OPERATOR POSITION SELF TEST

When the self-test has been completed, restore the console to normal operation as follows:

- Remove test box;- Re-establish the connection between the console and the system (Major Alarm lamp

should extinguish);- Plug in the handset. The console will be set to condition “present”. If this is the only

console “present” the system will go to day service.





13. CLEARANCE OF FAULTS

Faults in the system manifest themselves in one of the following ways:

a. Total System Failure; Reading out of fault reports no longer possible (from theMaintenance PC or the Operator Position).

b. By means of Fault Reports.

b.1. Faults are indicated through the alarm system: Operator Position, or externalalarm unit, or MPC. The fault reports can be read out from the Operator Position,or from the MPC by reading the Major and Minor alarm buffer.

b.2. Some faults trigger silent alarms; the associated fault reports can be read outfrom the Silent alarm buffer.

c. System Users, including the operator, detect a fault for which there is no automaticalarm.

Type a, points to a failure in the central part of the system, which consists of a limitednumber of units: CPU, associated memory and the PSU.

Type b, comprises the vast majority of possible faults. They are divided in the threecategories: MAJOR ALARM, MINOR ALARM and SILENT ALARM. Which fault leads towhich alarm is determined by PE parameters. The associated fault reports can be displayedusing OM procedures DIMAJA (6020), DIMINA (6021) and DISILA (6022) respectively. Inthese reports the system gives detailed information concerning the faults, as follows:

- Hardware : Shelf number, slot number and circuit on board numbers, Address identifying the location of the fault. (00000 means: not attributable to a

particular address).- Alarm code : 4 digits, giving the nature of the fault.- Date and Time : Moment that the alarm became activated or re-activated. (Re-activation

might be with or without buzzer signal.)- Number of : Number of times that the problem has been alarmed by System

Occurrence Asssurance Software. - Additional : Additional information (not for all alarm codes): 4 digits, giving extra

information information about the cause of the alarm. These digits have thefollowing format:

Note: Some hardware addresses in this chapter contain also references to SOPHOiS3050 ISPBXs as well as SOPHO-S250/S1000 PABXs; this is done in order toretain consistency with descriptions of the same parameters that appear in otherbooks.



or:XX XX

error type.

“ZZ”: further information. “ZZZ”: further information.

X XXX

error type.

Where there is no additional information, the display is left blank. For detailed informationconcerning these digits is referred to the section ”Actions in Case of Alarm”.

Notes: 1. For a number of the PCT-orientated faults the elapsed time between on-set ofthe fault and the alarm can be as much as 1.5 hours for every (full) shelfinstalled.

2. A large proportion of the alarms are automatically reset as soon as the problemis no longer detected. In the instructions detailed in "Actions in Case of Alarm",this situation is indicated by "AR" (Automatic Recovery).

Type c, User Complaints. In the case of simultaneous existence of user complaints andalarms, the alarms must be dealt with first. In many instances user complaints can betraced back to parts of the ISPBX which are not automatically tested, viz:

- The individual line-interface hardware in ALCs, MDF connections, lines, extensions.- The individual line-interface hardware in ATUs, MDF connections, lines to (and

equipment in) the distant exchange.- The operator's speech circuits (AOC/DOC on a PMC and associated part in operator

console).- Lamps (LEDs) on keys at an analogue operator console.

Directions for the localization of faults arising from user's complaints are given in thesection ”USER'S COMPLAINTS”.The maintenance engineer has to take into account another two items which are notautomatically tested:

- The Alarm Unit hardware, and its interface on the CPU board;- The MPC interface on the CPU board (V.24).

In most cases, the investigation of faults in each of the three categories (a, b and c) willlead to the replacement of hardware units (printed wiring boards, etc.). Detailed instructionsfor replacement and related testing are given in the Chapter ”Replacement Procedures”.



13.1. ACTIONS IN CASE OF TOTAL SYSTEM FAILURE

Total system failure is a situation in which the central control part of system is faulty in sucha way that communication with system from the MPC is also not possible.

Note: Possible replacements of printed wiring boards etc., should take place inaccordance with the directions given in Chapter 14 .

Before removing or fitting a PSU always switch off the PSU primary supply! (External 48 V DC box orMains). When a PSU is removed or placed with the primary supply switched on the PSU will be damaged.

- Action A: Check and/or repair the power supply system as follows.

1. Check the OK LED on the PSU, this is the lower LED. If this LED is alightall the internal voltages of the PSU are in order. Proceed with action B.

2. If the OK LED is off, check the mains supply. If there is no mains supplycheck and/or repair mains supply. Continue with step 1.

3. If mains supply is in order, check the fuse LEDs.4. If any fuse LED is alight, replace the associated fuse and continue with

step 1, else continue with step 5. 5. Remove the mains connector, wait for 10 seconds and replace the mains

connector. If the OK LED is alight continue with action B. If not continuewith step 6.

6. Measure the voltage on the F122 connector mounted on the PSU. Thevoltage between the left pin-column and the right pin-column should bebetween 42 and 60 Volts DC. If the voltage on the F122 connector is out of specification, check/repairthe mains transformer and rectifier bridge (bridge only on the iS3030).Maybe the thermo fuse of the mains transformer is blown. Continue withstep 1.If the voltage on the F122 connector is within specification, the mainstransformer and rectifier bridge are working properly. Continue with step 6.

7. Remove one of the wires of the EBU. If the OK LED is alight now, the EBUis suspect. If the EBU is empty during initial installation reconnect the EBUwire. It will take approximately 10 hours to charge the EBU, after thatperiod the OK LED should lit. In all other cases replace the EBU.

8. If both the OK LED and the fuse LEDs are off, pull out PCT boards forapproximately three centimetres one by one. DO NOT PULL THE PSUBOARD!! Leave the PMC and CPU board to the last. If the OK LED lits,the last pulled board is suspect. Replace and check this board, push backthe other boards and continue with step 1. If the OK LED is still off afterthe last board has been pulled out, remove the mains supply, wait at least5 (!) minutes and replace the PSU.



9. Power up. If the OK LED is alight proceed with action B. If the OK LED isoff replace the exchange, probably a fault in the backplane.

As soon as a possible supply fault has been corrected, the CPU starts up again (LED on). Ifit does not, force a WARM START or COLD START by interrupting the primary supply tothe PSU for 10 seconds.If MPC-CPU communication is again possible, proceed with Action D. Otherwise proceedwith Action B.

- Action B: If it is certain that the power supply system is correct:

1. Replace the CPU.Communication between MPC and CPU should now be possible again. Ifyes, proceed with Action D. If not, see Action C.

- Action C: If the previous actions to check the supply or replace PSU, or replace CPUhave not resulted in the restoration of communication between MPC andCPU, then repeat these steps in more detail and with greater precision asfollows:

- Pull out from the back panel connectors all printed wiring boards which arecurrently not strictly necessary.Set up a minimum central control configuration comprising: PSU, CPU andPMC.

- Inspect all connectors (including earth contacts).- Clean (dry!) the back panel connectors.- Use another MPC and another MPC-to-system cable or check the MPC

with another exchange.- Use another set of spare units (see the minimum configuration).

If none of this helps, it has to be assumed that the back panel of the CPU shelf is defective.Change the back panel or exchange.

- Action D: Communication between MPC and CPU is restored. Deal with any remainingalarms. Reset all alarms using OM CLALRM (6029).

1. If the system is not equipped with a parameter PROM reload the ProjectEngineering data, using the MPC.

2. Deal with any occurring alarms. Reset all alarms using OM CLALRM(6029).

3. Verify that telephony is possible again.



4. If the CPU has been replaced, test the CPU interface with the Alarm Unitand the CPU alarm interface with the MPC.

5. In the case of permanent replacements, note the remarks. (UpdatingProject Records).

13.2 ACTIONS IN CASE OF ALARM

The alarms MAJOR, MINOR and CIRCUIT BLOCKED are available at the FAA frontconnector of the CPU-ME at V.28 level, the function of the connector pins can be changedusing the command ASALRS (OM 6050). DIALRS (OM 6052) displays the current functionof how the connector pins present the alarms. See figure 13.1.

Figure 13.1. Front Connector Layout of Alarms.

GNDGNDGND

MAJORMINOR

CIRCUIT BLOCKED

108 308

101 301

FAA

In case of a major alarm, display the fault reports using DIMAJA (OM6020). In case of aminor alarm, display fault reports using DIMINA (OM6021). These OM procedures displaythe fault reports in order of the alarm codes (lowest code first). Deal with the alarms in theorder in which they appear, unless otherwise stated in the alarm instruction.

New alarms will be signalled by the alarm buzzer. There is no buzzer if an alarm reoccurs.

Any printed wiring board replacements should be effected in accordance with theinstructions given in chapters 14 and 15.

Re-insert the original board as soon as it becomes apparent that a board replacement hasnot led to any improvement.

Warning: Always switch OFF or disconnect the PSU primary supply (-48V DC or 220 VAC) of the exchange before removing or fitting a PSU.



In the EHWA a discrimination is made what function is meant, when alarming functions on acontrol board (CPU or PMC board). General an External Hardware Address (EHWA)consists of 5 digits, grouped SBBPP, meaning:

S = Shelf number;BB = Board position;PP = Circuit position on board.

With an alarm on a control board the ”PP” in the hardware address points at the possiblecause. The meaning of the PPs is as follows:

In the Central Module (CM), table 13.1:

Table 13.1. Central Module.

PP POINTS AT

99 CPU board (general)

In the Peripheral Module (PM), table 13.2:

Table 13.2. Peripheral Module.

PP POINTS AT

00...09 Break in Circuit

10 Analogue or Digital Operator Circuit11 Analogue Operator Circuit

12...17 Receiver of keytone

18...21 Receiver of Dial tone

30...45 Peripheral Circuit Processor

60 Clock Signal Generator

99 PMC board (general)



ALARM CODE: 1000ERROR TYPE: --

Major Alarm Overflow

Error type : --EHWA : 00000ZZ : --AR : No

There are too many major alarm fault reports for the Major Alarm Buffer. A fault report withthe highest alarm code (=lowest priority) has been deleted from the Major Alarm Buffer tomake space for this overflow fault report.

MAINTENANCE ACTIONS:

1. Take prompt action to clear the Major Alarms.2. Read out and deal with remaining alarms (Minor and Silent).3. Reset the alarms with OM procedure CLALRM (6029).




Minor Alarm Overflow


There are too many Minor Alarm fault reports for the Minor Alarm Buffer. A fault report withthe highest alarm code (= lowest priority) has been deleted from the Minor Alarm Buffer tomake space for this overflow fault report.


1. Read out and try to resolve all alarms. Reset them with OM CLALRM (6029).




Silent Alarm Overflow


There are too many Silent Alarm fault reports for the Silent Alarm Buffer. A fault report withthe highest alarm code (= lowest priority) has been deleted from the Silent Alarm Buffer tomake space for this overflow fault report.


1. Take prompt action to clear the Silent Alarms.2. Read out and deal with remaining alarms (Major and Minor).3. Reset the alarms with OM procedure CLALRM (6029).




Major Alarm External

Error type : --EHWA : 00000ZZ : --AR : Yes

An external condition, detected by the alarmunit, is passed on by the system as a majoralarm.


1. Reset the external alarm signal (if necessary, by a third party since it is an externalalarm) and investigate the cause of the alarm. (Rectifier alarm?).If no alarmunit is connected, this alarm will not occur.

2. In the case of a false alarm, the alarm unit should be suspected.



ALARM CODE: 1006ERROR TYPE: 10,20,30,40

POM-Memory Error

Error type : 10 = Program fail20 = Memory full30 = Projecting data error40 = Read fail

EHWA : 00000ZZ : --AR : No


1. In case of error Program fail or Read fail : retrieve project data and replace CPU-boardas required. Re-load project data.

2. In case of error Memory full : shorten project data.

3. In case of error Projecting data error : check project data.



ALARM CODE: 1008ERROR TYPE: 40

Major Central Equipment Alarm

Error type : 40 = PM absent/no acknowledge on the Cold Start commandEHWA : 10399 (iS3010) PMC

10799/30799 (iS3030) PMCS0999, S=0...7 (S250/1000) PMCS1799, S=0...3 (iS3050) PMC01360 (S250) CSN11360 (S1000) CSN01960 (iS3050) CSN

ZZ : --AR : No

If the CPU does not receive a correct response from the PMC/CSN, an alarm is generatedand a Warm Start is attempted.

If after the warmstart the response is still incorrect, the alarm is repeated.

If after the warmstart the response is correct, the alarm is cancelled and replaced by 1011,error type 60.

Possible causes of this alarm are amongst other things: faulty PMC (or CSN), faultychannel between CPU and PMC (or CSN), or faulty PMC/CSN channel part on the CPU.


1. Ensure that the PMC (or CSN) and the CPU are firmly in position. If this does not solvethe problem, continue with step 2.

2. Replace the PMC (or CSN), and if this does not help, replace the CPU.



ALARM CODE: 1008ERROR TYPE: 41,42

Major Central Equipment Alarm (continued)

Error type : 41 = No valid Flash EPROM package available in PMC.42 = Not compatible Flash EPROM package available in PMC.

EHWA : 10399 (iS3010)10799/30799 (iS3030)S0999, S=0...7 (S250/1000)S1799, S=0...3 (iS3050)

ZZ : --AR : Yes

This alarm is generated when the PMC does not contain a valid Flash EPROM package,while an attempt is made to start up this PMC.

Possible reasons : Corrupted PMC Flash EPROM package;orDeleted PMC Flash EPROM package.


1. Ensure that the PMC is loaded with a correct (valid) PMC package. Use OM commandDIPACK to retreive the PMC package id.

2. If the PMC package id is not correct, download the correct PMC package.





Error type : 50 = PM cannot become operational/restart command notacknowledged


ZZ : --AR : Yes

Communication between the Peripheral Module (PM) and the subunits is not possible. Thisis because the Peripheral Processor is not able to build up the required data tables.


1. Replace the PMC board.





Error type : 51 = PM PROGRAMMING ERROREHWA : 10399 (iS3010)

10799/30799 (iS3030)S0999, S=0...7 (S250/1000)S1799, S=0...3 (iS3050)

ZZ : 00 = Flash EPROM cannot be programmed successfully01 = Package checksum error02 = Flash EPROM was not cleared03 = Unexpected end of data04 = Not supported download data type10 = No PMC communication or response

AR : No

ZZ = 00 : The PMC failed to perform a successful programming of its Flash EPROM.ZZ = 01 : The data transmitted and programmed is detected to be incorrect, e.g.

transmission failures.ZZ = 02 : The Flash EPROM is detected not to be clear after a delete package or

before a download package.ZZ = 03 : The data received to be prgrammed is detected to be incompleteZZ = 04 : The download source file does contain a data type which are not supported

by the installed BOOT PROM of the PMC.ZZ = 10 : A PMC EHWA, cooperating a download or delete session, does not

response or does not confirm the BOOT phase.


On ZZ=00 or ZZ=02 after a delete package:1. Unrecoverable error, replace the PMC board.

On ZZ=01:1. Retry might be successful.

On ZZ=02 before download:1. Retry by a successive delete package and a secondary download.2. If step 1 does not solve the problem, then replace the PMC board.

On ZZ=03 or ZZ=04 after a delete package:1. Check the input file for validity. When other PMCs, downloaded with the same file, did

also signal this error, then the input file is invalid.



2. Retry if the file is valid.

On ZZ=10:1. Check PMC insertion and status (GREEN LED on at least) and retry.2. The problem may also rise when an inconsistency exists between PMC and CPU, if this

could be the case perform a warmstart and check the PMC to be global OUT.3. If a successive download or delete does deliver the same problem, it is most likely that

the PMC does not support the BOOT phase, necessary for download. Replace the PMCin this case.





Error type : 60 = PM phase mismatchEHWA : 10399 (iS3010)

10799/30799 (iS3030)S0999, S=0...7 (S250/1000)S1799, S=0...3 (iS3050)

ZZ : --AR : Yes

The CPU and Peripheral Processor are out of phase. The possible phases are:

- Pre-operational phase;- Re-starting phase;- Operational phase.

Example: A mismatch occurs if the Peripheral Module (PM) does a cold start.Then it re-opens communication in the pre-operational phase, while being registered asbeing in the operational phase in the CPU.

The CPU will do a warmstart to re-initialise the PM.If the warmstart is successfull, the alarm is cancelled, and replaced by alarm 1011,errortype 40.


1. If the alarm occurs frequently change the PMC. 2. If the alarm still keeps coming back, change the CPU and re-load the project data.3. If the alarm occurs rarely just record the event.





Error type : 70 = PM buffer overflowEHWA : 10399 (iS3010)

10799/30799 (iS3030)S0999, S=0...7 (S250/1000)S1799, S=0...3 (iS3050)

ZZ : --AR : Yes

Too many call events are offered to the Peripheral Module (PM). This event can indicatemalfunctioning of certain PCTs. It can also indicate an overload condition in the CPU or inthe Peripheral Processor.The CPU performs a Warm Start to re-initiate the PM.

If the warmstart is successfull, the alarm is cancelled, and replaced by alarm 1011,errortype 50.


1. In case of an occasional PM Congestion alarm, no specific actions have to be taken.Record/report the alarm.

2. If the alarm occurs frequently, it is advised to deal with possible other alarms first.3. Try to establish whether the problem is caused by:

- The loading of the system;- A PCT;- The Control Boards (CPU, PMC).

a. Investigate the system's loading with aid of traffic analysis.b. Set the PCTs in one shelf to OUT. If the problem disappears, set the PCTs one by

one to INS, until you found the faulty PCT.c. If this does not work, probably the CPU and/or the PMC is faulty.

4. Replace the PMC.5. If no improvement replace the CPU and re-load the project data.





Error type : 71 = CPU command buffer overflowEHWA : 10499 (iS3010)

10899/30799 (iS3030)01199/11199 (S250/1000)01899 (iS3050)

ZZ : --AR : yes

The CPU detected command buffer overflow. This can indicate an overflow condition in thePeripheral Processor. The CPU performs a Warm Start to re-initiate the Peripheral Module(PM)

If the warmstart is successfull, the alarm is cancelled, and replaced by alarm 1011, errortype 51.


1. In case of an occasional CPU command buffer overflow alarm, no specific actions haveto be taken. Record/report the alarm.

2. If the alarm occurs frequently, it is advised to deal with possible other alarms first.3. Investigate the system's loading with aid of traffic analysis. If this does not give the

cause of the problem go to step 3. 4. Replace the PMC.5. If no improvement, replace the CPU and re-load the project data.



ALARM CODE: 1008ERROR TYPE: 80 (1)


Error type : 80 = Operator communication, see also next page for the sameerror type

EHWA : 10310/10311 (iS3010)10710/10711/30710/30711 (iS3030)S0910/S0911, S=0...7 (S250/1000)S1710/S1711, S=0...3 (iS3050)

ZZ : --AR : yes

For the analogue operator position, this alarm is generated by the CPU when no morecorrect IN-data is received, which may be caused by the following:

- Defect in the IN-direction;- Defect in the OUT-direction causes the operator position to stop the data flow in the IN-

direction.

If the microcomputer in the analogue operator position still works, the Minor Alarm LED andthe buzzer are activated. The buzzer can be silenced using key ZA. If the microcomputer inthe analogue operator position is defective, then there are no alarm indications. If it is theonly operator position present, the system will automatically switch over to night service.


1. Check the connection of the operator console to the PMC board and the supply voltageto the operator console. Eliminate a possible extension cable fault by directly connectingthe operator position to the Analogue Operator Circuit (AOC). Use connector FAB/FACfor XXX10/XXX11 respectively.

2. If there is no improvement, carry out the operator position self test; sub test 1 is directlyrelevant.

3. If the operator position is usable, replace the AOC.

Note: To prevent this alarm occurring for those AOC's not connected to operatorpositions, set the operator circuit hardware addresses to NIN.



ALARM CODE: 1008ERROR TYPE: 80 (2)


Error type : 80 = I/O bus communication failureEHWA : 10399 (iS3010) PMC

10799/30799 (iS3030) PMCS0999, S=0...7 (S250/1000) PMCS1799, S=0...3 (iS3050) PMC

or10499 (iS3010) CPU10899 (iS3030) CPUS1199, S=0, 1 (S250/1000) CPU01899 (iS3050) CPU

ZZ : 00 = Peripheral Circuit Controller 0 (PCC0)01 = Peripheral Circuit Controller 1 (PCC1)02 = Add-on and Tone Control (ATC)03 = Protocol CoProcessor (PCP)04 = Digital Signal Processor 0 (DSP0)05 = Digital Signal Processor 1 (DSP1)06 = Digital Operator's Circuit (DOC)

The CPU or Peripheral Module (PM) detected a communication failure with the specifiedperipheral controller (in case of the CPU the PCP is the only possible component).

The CPU will do a warmstart to re-initialise the PM. If the warmstart is succesfull, the alarmis cancelled. This alarm then will be replaced by alarm 1011, error type 70.

This alarm 1008, error type 80, will be accompanied by the alarm ”major only by systemstart recoverable PM fault” (see alarm 1009, error type 80). The 1008, error type 80 alarmcan then only be found in the history bufer.

Note: The Break In Circuits (BIC) make use of the Add-on and Tone control.


1. If the error occurs more than once, replace the CPU or PMC (see EHWA).





Error type : 90 = PSU alarmEHWA : 00599 (iS3010) PSU

01199/21199 (iS3030) PSUS2699/S2799, S=0...7 (S250/1000) PSUS2099, S=0...3 (iS3050) PSU01360 (S250) CSN11360 (S1000) CSN01960 (iS3050) CSN

ZZ : 00 - 11AR : Yes

ZZ = 00 : Low voltage alarm.iS3010/3030/3050 : +5 V, -5 V, +12 V, -12 V, VCMOS, VBAT.S250/1000 : VCMOS (for CSN), -5 V, +12 V, -12 V

(< 0.6 V Backpanel pin BB309).VCMOS : Normally approx. 0.2 V higher than+5 V.VBAT : Voltage of the backup battery pack (EBU) for the

RAMs.

If the alarm is caused by too low VBAT, the alarm should disappear afterthe backup battery pack (EBU) is recharged by the internal battery charger(loading time approx. 6 hours).

ZZ = 01 : 48 V fuse alarm, fuse faulty or removed (iS3010/3030/3050 only). Seecorresponding LED.

ZZ = 02 : Ring voltage (25 Hz, 75 V) too low alarm (< 50 V). This alarm occurs afterthe ring voltage has been too low during more than 4 minutes (Backpanelpin BB109).

ZZ = 03 : Low AC-Voltage alarm. The mainpower voltage is too low.ZZ = 04 : Early powerfail detected, not resulting in power down, might have reset

boards.ZZ = 05 : Frame synchronisation slip alarm.ZZ = 06 : -48 V group 0 alarm (< -31 V / Backpanel pin BB111).ZZ = 07 : -48 V group 1 alarm (< -31 V / Backpanel pin BB311).ZZ = 08 : -48 V group 2 alarm (< -31 V / Backpanel pin BB113).ZZ = 09 : -48 V group 3 alarm (< -31 V / Backpanel pin BB313).ZZ = 10 : -48 V External power supply alarm (< -31 V / Backpanel pin BB115).ZZ = 11 : Low voltage VBAT alarm (only from CSN in S250/1000).




1. When ZZ=05:This indicates a reset of the ATC on the PMC.If this error occurs only rarely, no further action is required.If the error occurs frequently or alarm 1080 also occurs, check the external clocksynchronisation.

Otherwise:

2. Check the fuses.

3. When ZZ=00:To check whether this alarm is caused by too low VBAT only :Remove the connection to the backup battery pack (EBU). VBAT now will detect normalvoltage and if the alarm was caused by VBAT only, the alarm should disappear.

4. Disconnect or switch off the mains.If the fuses and the external supply are in good condition , replace the PSU.




Major, only by system restart recoverable PM fault

Error type : 80 = I/O bus communication failureEHWA : 10399 (iS3010) PMC

10799/30799 (iS3030) PMCS0999, S=0...7 (S250/1000) PMCS1799, S=0...3 (iS3050) PMCor10499 (iS3010) CPU10899 (iS3030) CPUS1199, S=0, 1 (S250/1000) CPU01899 (iS3050) CPU

ZZ : 00 = Peripheral Circuit Controller 0 (PCC0)01 = Peripheral Circuit Controller 1 (PCC1)02 = Add-on and Tone Control (ATC)03 = Protocol CoProcessor (PCP)04 = Digital Signal Processor 0 (DSP0)05 = Digital Signal Processor 1 (DSP1)06 = Digital Operator's Circuit (DOC)

The CPU or Peripheral Module (PM) detected a communication failure with the specifiedperipheral controller (in case of the CPU the PCP is the only possible component). If thisalarm is not only present in the history buffer, but also in the alarmbuffer, the CPU did nottry to recover the failure. This may be caused by an important system function which is notoperational anymore.

The CPU action, when storing the alarm in the history buffer, depends on a previousoccurance and the integration time.

1. There is no previous 1009 alarm present in the historybuffer. -or-2. There is such alarm present, but not satisfying the integration time:

The IO-bus timeout did not occur recently.The 1009 alarm is stored only in the history buffer.An 1008-80 alarm is generated and a warmstart is performed.See also alarm 1008-80 (2)

3. There is a previous 1009 alarm present, satisfying the integration time. Another IO-bustimeout occurred recently. No 1008-80 alarm (and warmstart!) is generated, but the



number of occurancies is increased in the history buffer, and the 1009-80 alarmreport isnow copied to the alarm buffer.

Notes: 1. The Break In Circuits (BIC) make use of the Add-on and Tone control.2. In case of a permanently not functioning controller the system does just one

warmstart as a recovery attempt. After that warmstart no action is takenanymore. This means that the maintenance engineer does not have to read outthe alarms in a continuously warmstarting system.


1. Try to confirm the malfunctioning of the indicated controller.2. Replace PMC or CPU (see the EHWA) if required.



ALARM CODE: 1010ERROR TYPE : 10, 15, 30, 35, 40, 50,

51, 60, 61, 70, 80, 90Cold Start Done,

Error type : 10 = Initial power-up15 = Watchdog expired30 = Power-up and CPU data mutilated35 = CPU I/O congestion and CPU data mutilated40 = PM phase mismatch and CPU data mutilated50 = PM congestion and CPU data mutilated51 = CPU command buffer overflow and CPU data mutilated60 = PM absent and CPU data mutilated61 = CSN absent and CPU data mutilated70 = I/O bus time out and CPU data mutilated80 = Too many restarts and CPU data mutilated90 = Warmstart forced by OM procedure 9100 and CPU data

mutilatedEHWA : 00000ZZ : --AR : No

A Coldstart has been performed. The error type in the additional information in the faultreport identifies the reason. All previous alarms have been reset.


1. Make a note of any other alarms (examine later).2. In case of an occasional Cold Start (e.g. arising from an external supply interruption) the

emergency battery unit (EBU) is suspect. A forced interruption of the external supplyshould result in a Warmstart (alarm code 1011). Check the EBU, PSU and CPU.

3. If coldstarts frequently occur without apparent external reasons perform the followingsteps:a. Replace the CPU and reload the system.

b. If the error still occurs, replace the PSU and reload the system.

Note: On the operator position, only the autonomous minor alarm is indicated. Thesystem will have already stopped data transmission to the Operator Position.



ALARM CODE: 1011ERROR TYPE: 30, 35, 40, 50, 51, 60,

61,70, 80, 90Warm Start Done

Error type : 30 = Power-up35 = CPU I/O congestion40 = PM phase mismatch50 = PM event buffer overflow51 = CPU command buffer overflow60 = PM absent61 = CSN absent70 = I/O bus time out80 = Too many restarts90 = Forced by OM procedure WARMST, 9100

EHWA : 00000ZZ : --AR : No

A Warmstart has been performed. The project data is still intact. The error type in theadditional information of the fault report identifies the reason for the start.


1. Make a note of any other alarms (examine later). If a Peripheral Module (PM) isinvolved, it can be identified in the 1008 reports.

2. Reset the alarms with OM procedure CLALRM (6029).3. In case of error type 40, 50, 51, 60 (or 61) or 70, check the PMC (or CSN).

The PM number can be found in the history buffer, check alarm codes 1008 - error types60/70/71/80 for PMs. When communication loss or fail is detected on a PM, an alarm isstored for that PM. The CPU performs a warmstart. If the CPU can re-establishcommunication with that PM, the specific alarms for that PM (alarm 1008 60/70/80) arecleared. They still can be found in the history buffer.

4. In case of error type 80, see alarm code 1013.5. In case of error type 30 or 90, no specific actions have to be taken.

Notes: 1. A Warm Start leads to the breaking of all current telephone connections.2. Emergency bypass telephones will continue to be directly connected to

exchange lines for 1 minute after the warm start is completed.




Restart Done

Error type : 10 = Restart done - Exception occurredEHWA : 00000ZZ : --AR : No

An exception in the software has occurred. The software control is forced back to theOperating System. The connections remain intact.


1. Record/report the alarm. If possible, include the specific conditions under which thiserror occurred.

2a. Read out and deal with any other alarms.2b. Use the command GENADF as follows:

- GENADF: 8999,<FILE NAME>; (read exception buffer)- GENADF: 8998,<FILE NAME>; (read exception buffer and erase it)

3. If there are no other alarms, a software error must be assumed, which should bereported to the manufacturer.

4. Reset the alarms with OM procedure CLALRM (6029).



ALARM CODE: 1014ERROR TYPE: 1. . . 5,7

PE Parameter Error

Error type : 1 = Tone error (0ZZ= tone number)(related to PE24ZZ)

2 = Ring rhythm error (0ZZ= tone number)(related to PE24(ZZ+32))

3 = Ticker tone error (0ZZ= ticker number)(related to PE24(ZZ+64))

4 = Signal group byte data error (ZZZ= line number-1)(related to PE4400) *

5 = Signal group bit data error (ZZZ= line number-1)(related to PE4401) *

7 = Slave data error (00Z= slave type)(related to PE4402)


ZZZ : Tone, ticker or signal group number or slave typeAR : No

* : With the line number is meant:The Nth call of the calls to projecting procedure PE4400/4402 in the DLF summarisedwith the calls made in the effectuated part of the projectstore. The latter is possiblewhen additional projecting in a projected system is done.

During sending of Project Engineering (PE) data to a Peripheral Module (PM), the indicatedparameter has been found incorrect.

Line number = Line number in the projecting data load file (DLF) starting at the first callto projecting procedure PE4400/4401.

Notes: The CPU does not validate data to be sent to the PM, when executing the POMdata. The PM just validates the data during the startup.

In the tables 13.3 up to 13.6 the tone numbers, the ringing numbers, the slave numbers andtheir associate meaning are given.




1. The PE parameters are not correct. Check the PE file and then reload, using theexisting or a new file as required.

Table 13.3. System Tones.

Note: 1. The internal and tie line ringing tone.2. The tone is sent to the destination party only, using a break-in circuit. The BIC

is switched in during approximately one second.

TONENUMBER TONE

DEFAULTTONE

SOURCE

DEFAULTRHYTHMNUMBER

NOTE

00 Internal Ringing Tone. 15 26 101 External Ringing Tone. 15 2602 Internal Dial Tone. 15 0003 First External Dial Tone. 05 0004 Second and following External Dial Tones. 15 0005 Delayed Hot Line Dial Tone. 15 0006 Busy Tone. 15 0707 Number Unobtainable Tone. 15 0908 Congestion Tone. 15 0809 Diversion Active Tone. 15 5310 Confirmation Tone. 15 0011 Urging Tone. 15 56 212 Call Waiting Tone Burst. 15 08 213 Paging Absent Tone. 15 0914 Paging in Progress Tone. 15 2615 By-Pass Tone. 15 1817 Camp On Busy Tone. 15 2518 Park Tone. 15 0719 Through Connect Ring Tone. 15 2620 Basic Ticker Tone 0 023 Call Waiting Indication Tone. 0 24 224 Alternative Routing Dial Tone. 15 5325 Alternative Routing Warning Tone. 0 026 Enter Password Tone. 05 53



Table 13.4. Ringing Rhythms.

RINGRHYTHM

TONENUMBER

RHYTHMDEFAULTRHYTHMNUMBER

00 Internal Ring Current Rhythm. 2601 External Ring Current Rhythm. 2702 Auto Ring Back Ring Current Rhythm. 2603 Emergency Ring Current Rhythm. 0004 Through Connect Ring Current Rhythm. 2705 SSM Ring Current Rhythm A. 0706 SSM Ring Current Rhythm B. 5807 Night Service Ring Current Rhythm. 59

Table 13.5. Ringing Rhythms.

TICKERNUMBER RHYTHM

DEFAULTTONE

SOURCE

DEFAULTRHYTHMNUMBER

00 Break in Ticker Rhythm. 01 0001 Add-On Ticker Rhythm. 01 57

Table 13.6. Slave Numbers.

SLAVENUMBER SLAVE TYPE

8 Tone Frequency9 Tone Level




PE Parameter Error (continued)

Error type : 6 = Board installation errorEHWA : XXX99 = Board addressZZZ : ---AR : No

Error type : 8 = PCT installation errorEHWA : XXXXX = PCT addressZZZ : ---AR : No

During the sending of project data (PE data) to the PM, an invalid signalling group numberwas detected.


1. Check the PE file for correct version and exchange numbers.2. Check all Variable Signalling Data Block numbers and PCT types in the PE data print-

out, and correct if necessary.

IMPORTANT

If the CPU has done a COLDSTART, and the CPU has taken the default projecting data(present in ROM), the PMC assumes an analogue operator (AOC board mounted on PMC).When hardware is installed for the digital operator (DOC board mounted on PMC), thePMC will detect an error during initialisation of the hardware. This will result in the projectingerror mentioned here:

EHWA : 10310 (iS3010)10710 (iS3030)00910 (S250)10910 (S1000)01710 (iS3050)

Alarmcode : 1014Error type: 8

This alarm is normal during the coldstart, so the DOC-hardware should not be suspected oferrors at this moment.




PE Parameter Error (continued)

Error type : 9 = Time-out errorEHWA : 10399 (iS3010)

10799/30799 (iS3030)S0999, S=0...7 (S250/1000)S1799, S=0...3 (iS3050)

ZZZ : ---AR : No

During the projecting/initialization phase a projecting/initialization command was notacknowledged by the PM.


1. If other errors are reported, check those errors first. Alarm 1014, error type 9 is usuallyaccompanied and caused by other errors.

2. If no other errors are reported, check the PE file.




Emergency bypass function is activated

EHWA : 00000AR : Yes


Verify the reason why the emergency bypass is activated.




Garbage Buffer Overflow


More irregularities are detected in the processing of telephony functions than statisticallymay be expected (unexpected call events).


1. Read out the Garbage Buffer with OM procedure DIGABU (6024).2. Determine the common factor in the reports.

Overflow of the garbagebuffer can be caused by abnormal usage of a signalgroup for aPCT. It can also be caused by a CPU or PPU software error.

To interpret the events in the garbage buffer specific knowlegde is required about thesystem's software architecture.

Notes: 1. If the Garbage Buffer becomes full, an alarm is given and the contents arefrozen.

2. The buffer can be cleared by means of an OM procedure, which also resets thealarm.

3. A coldstart will also clear the buffer and reset the alarm.4. The garbage event buffer leaks with one event per day.




Minor Alarm External


An external condition is passed on by the system as a Minor Alarm.


1. Reset the external alarm signal and investigate its cause, e.g. rectifier.2. In the case of a false alarm, check the alarm unit.




Board Fault

Error type : 10 = ESU/MCE board removedEHWA : XXX99 = ESU/MCE board addressZZ : --AR : Yes

The indicated emergency bypass board ('MCE-') has been removed from the system. Theemergency switch over function for the extensions connected via this board is no longeroperational.

ESU = Emergency Switch over UnitMCE = Metering Circuit & Emergency Switch over Unit


1. In case the MCE is installed, and this alarm is active, replace the board.




Board Fault (continued)

Error type : 20 = PMC board failureEHWA : XXX99 = Board addressZZ : 00 = Board not operational

01 = Board communication failed02 = Board queue congestion03 = Out of synchronisation04 = Flow request failed06 = DOC communication fail

AR : No

A fault is discovered for a second time within 12 minutes during the operational phase ofspecific control hardware on the board. This error will only be reported for those boardscontaining a microprocessor, or for boards controlled by another board with amicroprocessor.

When the fault occurs only once within 12 minutes alarm 1040 error type 50 is generatedinstead.

SAS will subsequently disable call processing for the PCTs controlled by the board, andpossibly generate a PCT removed alarm. The latter alarm is possible when the SAS takes aPCT out of operation.


1. Retry to activate the board by removing and re-installing it.2. If no improvement, or if the alarm reoccurs later on, replace the board.





Error type : 30 = Board activation errorEHWA : XXX99 = Board addressZZ : 00 = Board not operational

01 = Board communication failed02 = Board queue congestion04 = Flow request failed07 = Board in boot mode, package present08 = Board in boot mode, no package present09 = Board in boot mode, package corrupted10 = Board package deletion failed11 = Board package downloading not supported

AR : No

A fault is discovered during the activation of specific control hardware on the board. Thiserror will only be reported for those PCT boards containing a microprocessor, like DTUsand DLCs, and in particular after a system start. The System Assurance Software (SAS)will subsequently disable call processing for the PCTs on the board.


1. Replace the PCT board.





Error type : 31 = Board programming errorEHWA : XXX99 = Board addressZZ : 80 = FEPROM cannot be programmed successfully

: 81 = Package checksum error: 82 = FEPROM was not cleared: 83 = Unexpected end of data: 84 = The download source file contains a data type that is not

supported by the boot PROM installed on the board: 85 = Board was not in boot mode: 86 = Board communication failure

AR : No


80 or 82 (after a delete package command)Unrecoverable error, replace the PCT board.

81 A retry might be successful.

82 (before a download)Retry by first deleting the package and then performing a second download. Ifthe problem is not solved replace the PCT board.

83, 84 Check that the input file is valid; if downloads to other boards report the sameerror using the same file, then the file is invalid.

85 Put PCT in boot mode.86 Replace the PCT board.





Error type : 40 = Board hard timer errorEHWA : XXX99 = Board addressZZ : --AR : No

During progress of a process, congestion was met when retrieving a timer from a pool offree timers. The timer was required for an important function, and continuing the processwithout the timer would risk the progress of the communication protocol.

If the error occurs the first time, the CPU tries to re-activate the board. The board is keptunder special attention during 12 minutes.

If the error does not re-occur within 12 minutes alarm 1040 error type 50 is generated.If the error reoccurs the System Assurance Software (SAS) will disable callprocessing forthe PCTs on the board, and generate this alarm (1040 error type 40) .


1. Try re-activation by removing and inserting the board.2. If this does not help replace the board. 3. Frequent occurence of this alarm can indicate overload of the PMC.





Error type : 50 = Intermittent board faultEHWA : XXX99 = Board addressZZ : --AR : No

The PM detected a communication failure between the PMC and the board controller on thespecified board.

The CPU deactivated the board and reactivated it. The board was monitored for 12minutes, and no further failure event of the board was received.

If, within the 12 minutes, a board controller communication failure is detected for a secondtime, alarm code 1040 error type 20 is generated instead. In this case the board will bebooked absent, and can only be recovered by re-installing it.



If this error occurs rarely, no further action is required.If this error occurs frequently or alarm code 1040 error type 20 occurs, the board should bereplaced.





Error type : 51 = Intermittent board faultEHWA : XXX99 = Board addressZZ : 06 = Digital Operator Circuit (DOC)AR : No

The PM detected a communication failure between the PMC and the board controller on thespecified board. The PM itself did a successfull attempt to recover the board.

The PCT(s) on the board have been unoperational for a while, generating possibly an 1042alarm, error type 50, ZZ=02 (link error). This alarm will be cancelled once the board isrecovered.

If the PM is unable to recover the board, alarm 1008, error type 80xx is generated instead(I/O-bus timeout). In that case the system will perform a warmstart to re-initialise thefunction on that board.


If this error occurs rarely, no further action is required.If this error occurs frequently, the board should be replaced.



ALARM CODE: 1041ERROR TYPE: 20,21,30

Intermittent PCT Fault

Error type : 20 = An important unexpected event for a PCT has been received21 = The CPU and the Peripheral Processor are not synchronized (call

failure event)30 = The automatic “In Service” PCT testloop found a faulty PCT. It

was put in ABL condition. The ABL test loop tested the PCTagain, found that it was correct, and put it back to service again.The transition INS-ABL caused alarm 1042 error type 20. Thetransition ABL-INS cleared the 1042 alarm error type 20, andgenerated the alarm 1041 error type 30 instead.

EHWA : XXXXX= PCTZZ : ONLY for error type 20:

01 = CALL-REQUEST08 = CALL-REQUEST-FOR-INTERCOM16 = TRUNK-IDLE17 = INCOMING-SEIZURE19 = FORWARD-RELEASE-RECEIVED20 = BACKWARD-RELEASE-RECEIVED22 = CALLED-PARTY-ONHOOK-RECEIVED48 = READY-FOR-SEIZURE-RKT-RDT51 = NO-FORWARD-MFC-SIGNAL52 = MFC-READY-FOR-RELEASE70 = PAGING-CHANNEL-IDLE

136 = PCT-ORDER-FAILED137 = PCT-TIME-TABLE-FULL139 = SERVICE-ORDER-REJECTED144 = MFC-PROCEDURE-FAILED145 = PCT-HARD-TIMER-ERROR

AR : No

The call processing program has detected a fault, which cannot be confirmed by theSystem Assurance Software (SAS). The PCT concerned is set to IDLE, and made availableagain for call processing. To interpret the event belonging to error type 20 specificknowledge is required about the system's software architecture. An explanation about themeaning of events is outside the scope of this manual.


1. If a particular PCT is repeatedly alarmed, replace the PCT board concerned.2. Read out and deal with any other alarms.




Intermittent PCT Fault (continued)

Error type : 40 = Successful retry to get the PCT operationalEHWA : XXXXX = any PCT positionZZ : --

For explanation of ZZ see alarm code 1042 error type 50.AR : No

The PPU detected a communication failure between the PCT and the outside world.(except for: no terminal being connected to the PCT).

The CPU did a rollback on that PCT. The PCT was monitored for 12 minutes, and nofurther failure event of that PCT was received.

If, within 12 minutes, a communication failure is detected for a second time, alarm code1042 error type 50 and up is generated instead. In this case the PCT will be bookedunoperational and can only be recovered by taking it out of service, followed by putting itinto service again.


1. If this error occurs rarely, no further action is required.2. If this error occurs frequently, or alarm code 1042 error type 50 and up occurs, check

the connection with the outside world. 3. If this does not help, replace the board.




PCT Fault

Error type : 10 = PCT put in unobtainable condition due to unoperationalcondition of the board.

EHWA : XXXXX = Board addressZZ : --AR : Yes

The indicated board has been removed (or taken out operation by SAS) from the system orbecame deactivated while one or more PCTs on the board were in the circuit condition INS.

Or:

A PCT on specified board was put into service while the board was removed, or could notbe activated. (check possible 1040-30 alarm)

Note: After system start PCT's on absent or not activated boards are not put into service,so no alarm reports will be generated.

The PCTs may be put into service by OM 7040.

Or:

A PCT on specified board was in service while the board was booked unoperational by theCPU due to some reason (check possibly also present 1040 alarms).

This alarm disappears as soon as the board is re-installed or the last in-service-PCT is putin the OUT or NIN condition.

If a board cannot be activated after the board is installed (check with OM 7032), the boardshould be replaced.


1. Check possible relation with alarm 1040, error type 20 or with alarm 1048.2. If the removal is permanent, set the circuit condition of the PCTs to NIN.

Note: If a relationship between boards has been specified, removal of the master boardwill also cause the PCTs on the associated boards to be "removed".




PCT Fault (continued)

Error type : 20 = PCT test faultEHWA : XXXXX = PCT addressZZ : --AR : Yes

The indicated PCT is found faulty by the automatic INS test. The PCT is automatically set tothe circuit condition ABL.


1. Replace the PCT board concerned.

See also explanation with alarm 1041 error type 30.





Error type : 30 = PCT permanently busyEHWA : XXXXX = PCT addressZZ : --AR : Yes

The indicated PCT is recorded as "busy" by the software for longer than a specified time.


1. If necessary listen-in on a LCT or trunk line to verify that the connection is still valid.Maybe terminate the call to free the line.

2. If freeing the line is unsuccessful (OM SERBRQ, 1028) read out it's current state (OMDIPCTS 1026), and report the result to the service organisation. Force a Warm Start bymeans of OM WARMST (9100) at a suitable time.

3. If the busy condition has to be considered as normal the alarm can be reset by means ofOM CLALRM (6029). Free the line by OM SERBRQ (1028).

Note: PCTs involved in connections with dataprotection are not reported “permanently”busy.





Error type : 40 = PCT permanently idleEHWA : XXXXX = PCT addressZZ : --AR : Yes

The indicated PCT is recorded as "Idle" by the software. This means that this PCT is notseized for longer than a specified time. The period of time is specified by means of aProject Engineering (PE) procedure.


1. Determine the functional group to which the indicated PCTs belong.

2. If they are ATUs, also determine the trunk group number to which they belong andwhether this trunk group is used for incoming and outgoing calls.

3. Check the PE data for this functional/trunk group.

4. Verify the operation of the PCT(s) involved.





Error type : 50 = Line circuit (LCT)/Operator circuit (OCT)failureEHWA : XXXXX = LCT/OCT/Digital Trunk addressZZ : 00 = Service button pushed too long (ALC)

01 = Disable received (ALC)02 = Link error (DLC, KTLC)03 = Hard link error (DLC, KTLC)06 = Order failed (DLC, KTLC, DTU-BA,

DTU-PH, DTX-I)07 = Service order failed (DLC, KTLC)08 = Terminal no response (DLC, KTLC)09 = Buffer congestion (DLC)13 = Controller no response (DLC, KTLC)10 = Wrong voice/data indication (DLC, KTLC)12 = Crossed lines (DLC)

AR : No

00: In ”closed loop” condition the a-wire was too long connected toearth. This error can indicate a cabling failure. When a lot ofALC's generate this alarm (“drowned cable?”), the system maybecome overheated.

01: The (ALC) board is erroneous.

02, 03, 06, 07, 08, 09, 13: A fatal PMC-DLC, PMC-KTLC, PMC-DTU-BA, PMC-DTU-PHor PMC-DTX communication failure occurred. The CPU hasalready done an attempt to recover the circuit from a recentsimular error and put it under special attention. This recoveryattempt failed: the error re-occurred within 12 minutes. Now thecircuit is put out of operation (blocked by SAS).

Exception: When a LAM 308 or SOPHO-SET 308 is connectedto the DOC board, and the A-B wires are reversed, the alarm1042 with additional info 5002 will occur for the ports on theDOC.

10: The port is incorrectly assigned: e.g. as a data port, while beinga voice port.

12: A-B-wire are reversed.




1. Check if error can be explained by wrong or bad connections between PCT and theterminal, for example. When required, put the PCT back into service by taking ittemporary out of service.

2. If the connections are correct, the board should be replaced.

The concerned PCT will be set unavailable for call processing. It can be recovered bytaking it out of service, followed by putting it into service again. If no action is taken within24 hours this alarm is possibly followed by a 1050 alarm.





Error type : 60,61 = Peripheral Circuit (PCT) / Virtual Circuit (VCT) activation errorEHWA : XXXXX = PCT/VCT address on DTU-boardZZ : 14 = Logical link disconnectedAR : No

(This alarm is related to alarm code 1041 error type 40)

For a second time within 12 minutes a PCT/VCT could not be put in operation, thecommunication link could not be set up.


1. Check the connections and cables from and to the IPH boards.2. If the connections and cables are correct replace the IPH boards.





Error type : 70 = Communication failureEHWA : XXXXX = Address of port on IPH-boardZZ : 06 = D-channel wrong reply

10 = PE parameter failure13 = D-channel no reply

AR : No

(This alarm is related to alarm code 1041 error type 40)

An alarm is reported for the second time by the corresponding circuit, within 12 minutes.


If ZZ = 06 or 13 : check the connections and the cables from and to the IPH boards.If the connections and the cables are correct, replace the IPH boards.

If ZZ = 10 : Check the Project Engineering (PE) data from the DTU-IPHcombination.





Error type : 80 = Protocol mismatchEHWA : XXXXX = PCT addressZZ : --AR : No

The communication protocol between the system, and the device connected to the systemdoes not match.


Check compatibility between equipment defined in the system and equipment connected tothe system. For example a LAM is connected, but the circuit is defined in system asSupervisor-set.





Error type : 90 = Execute CPM failureEHWA : XXXXX = PCTZZ : --AR : No

An internal software inconsistency has been detected.


Read ou the garbage buffer (MML command DIGABU) and send information to PQShelpdesk.




DCC Board Alarm

Error type : 10 = RFP errorEHWA : XXX99 = DCC board addressZZ : --AR : No


1. Check RFP connections.2. Check RFP or replace RFP.




DCC Board Alarm(continued)

Error type : 20 = Burst mode controller errorEHWA : XXX99 = DCC board addressZZ : --AR : No


1. Replace the DCC board.





Error type : 30 = Backbone communication is lostEHWA : XXX99 = DCC board addressZZ : --AR : No


1. Check strap settings on DCC board.2. Try to reboot the DCC board.3. If all fails, replace the DCC board.





Error type : 40 = General hardware errorEHWA : XXX99 = DCC board addressZZ : --AR : No





Error type : 50 = General software errorEHWA : XXX99 = DCC board addressZZ : 01 = Subscription database corrupt

02 = DCC-address incorrect03 = Duplicate DNR in the system

AR : No


If ZZ = 01 : Perform backup of the board. Look in the generated .LST file whichentries are corrupt. Perform cleanup command on the board, the DCCwill then remove automatically the corrupted records.

If ZZ = 02 : The RFPs on this board will not become in service. The green ledkeeps flashing. The DCC is placed in the wrong position (or stillcontains subscription from a previous life). Perform backup commandof the board to look which DNRs are on the board. Place the board onthe right position or remove all subscriptions.

If ZZ = 03 : A DNR has been moved in the ehwadnr.pdt file to another EHWA (onanother board), but the previous subscription is still present on theDCC. This alarm should always be present on 2 boards. Perform abackup of both boards and check which board contains the right one. Ifthe ehwadnr.pdt file must be repaired, again perform a backup of bothboards. Perform a cleanup of both boards, first the faulty board andthen the right board.





Error type : 60 = The RFP-ID is missing or incorrectEHWA : XXX99 = DCC board addressZZ : --AR : No


1. The RFP-ID downloaded from the PM to the DCC is missing or incorrect. Project correctRFP-ID parameters in the PM data.




DCC Board Configuration Alarm

Error type : 10 = The RFP configuration does not match with the actual situationEHWA : XXX99 = DCC board addressZZ : --AR : No


1. In the DECT manager, adapt the RFP configuration to the actual situation.Clear the alarms.



ALARM CODE: 1045ERROR TYPE: 01...13

Manually Controlled Test - Error Report

Error type : 00 = Wrong or no response after putting the circuit in the testmode01 = CODEC test02 = Signalling test03 = Transmission test04 = Transmission test from port 0 to port 105 = Transmission test from port 1 to port 006 = Transmission test from port 0 to port 207 = Transmission test from port 2 to port 008 = Transmission test from port 1 to port 209 = Transmission test from port 2 to port 110 = Taxmetering test11 = Receiver test12 = Sender test (only on RST-KD)13 = Polarity test

EHWA : XXXXX = PCTZZ : --AR : No

The indicated Peripheral Circuit (PCT) is found faulty during a manually controlled test.


1. Replace the PCT board concerned.



ALARM CODE: 1046ERROR TYPE: 01...13

Manually Controlled Test - Information

Error type : 00 = Test Set Up01 = CODEC test02 = Signalling test *03 = Transmission test *04 = Transmission test from port 0 to port 105 = Transmission test from port 1 to port 006 = Transmission test from port 0 to port 207 = Transmission test from port 2 to port 008 = Transmission test from port 1 to port 209 = Transmission test from port 2 to port 110 = Taxmetering test *11 = Receiver test12 = Sender test (only on RST-KD)13 = Polarity test *

EHWA :XXXXX = PCT addressZZ : 01 = PCT not installed

02 = Circuit Condition ABL03 = Waiting time exceeded04 = No test program available05 = No auxiliary PCT available, for example:

- No INS RKT for Test Phase 1;- No INS RDT for Test Phase 3;- No INS RDT or RKT for Test Phase 12;- One or more ALCs or ATUs on same board are not NIN.

AR : No

* Only when test cards/connectors are used.The indicated Peripheral Circuit (PCT) could not be (completely) tested. The reason isindicated by ZZ.

MAINTENANCE ACTIONS:1. Check for possible incompatibilities between:

- PCT type under test;- Circuit condition of the PCT under test;- Test type as specified in the Target list;- Type of Test Card / Connector fitted (if applicable);- Non-resident test program(s) where applicable.

2. If necessary, repeat the test with another Test Card/ Connector.3. If necessary, replace the indicated PCT.



ALARM CODE: 1048ERROR TYPE: 00,01,02,03,05,06,07,08,09

DTU Alarm

Error type : 00 = DTU Loss of frame alignment01 = DTU Remote alarm detected02 = DTU Alarm Indication Siganl (AIS) detected03 = DTU Excessive error rate detected05 = DTU Clock error detected06 = DTU Alarm indication by LTU07 = DTU Signalling handles watch dog alarm08 = DTU Loss of multiframe alignment09 = DTU Remote alarm Timeslot 16 detected

EHWA : XXX99 = DTU board addressZZ : --AR : Yes

A DTU alarm has been generated. The error type in the additional information in the faultreport identifies the reason.It is beyond the scope of this manual to explain the possible reasons. Just report the reasonwhen replacing the board.



1. Error type 00,02,03,06,08:

a. Check the 2 Mb/s line, for example:- Board connector;- Cable might be too long;- Too much jitter;- Transient resistance too high.

b. DTU or Line Termination Unit (LTU), if present, might be faulty.

2. Error type 01,05,07,09:Probably DTU or LTU (if present) faulty. Replace the DTU and/or LTU board.




DTU-Slip detected

Error type : --EHWA : XXX99 = DTU board addressZZ : --AR : No

On the DTU board a "slip" is detected. This error may occur when there are badconnections in the 2 Mb/s link. This alarm can also be given when taking the 2Mb/s link inservice, for example, after installation, or after starting up the system.

"Slip" occurs when the clocks of the interconnected exchanges are not synchronised.


1. Check that one of the systems is “clock-slave” of the other and that in the “slave”-systemthe concerned DTU has a connection to the clock circuit-inlet on the PMC.

2. Check that the DTU-board functions properly.




PCT Excluded from Normal Traffic

Error type : --EHWA : XXXXX = PCTZZ : --AR : Yes

The indicated Peripheral Circuit (PCT) is excluded from normal traffic for reasons beyondits control. This alarm will be generated 24 hours after the alarm situation arose. It has adifferent meaning, depending on the PCT type: (for PCT type: see PE procedure 4000)

Voice/Data Channel : SOPHO-SET not or not correct connected.Data Channel : LAM not or not correct connected.Trunk unit : Trunkline not connected or trunk in distant exchange not in

operation.B or V channel : Opposite B or V channel not in operation (used with DTU-PR)D-channel : D channel not in operation (used with DTU-PR)

Note: This alarm may be related to alarm code 1042, error type 50/60/61/70/80.


1. a. Check the terminal connections in case the indicated PCT is a Voice Channel or aData Channel.

b. Check the connection to the distant exchange in case the indicated PCT is an ATU.2. B-channel/V-channel : check opposite B-channels/V-channels3. D-channel : check other alarms. If problem still remains: Replace the

boards.




PCT Blocked by Dial Tone Time Out


This alarm will be generated only if a check on time out of dialtone has been defined by PEprocedure 2028.

After detection of no-dial-tone, the trunk concerned is given to a process that checks atregular intervals if still no dial tone can be detected. If now dialtone is detected the trunk lineis again available for call processing. The trunk line becomes also available again for callprocessing when an incoming seizure is detected.


1. Check the operation of the indicated Peripheral Circuit (PCT) with the test telephoneand possibly with a manually controlled test.

2. Maybe the trunk is not connected to the public exchange, because the emergencybypass is active.

3. If no error is found, check with the staff of the public telephony exchange.




ISDN Trunk(s) excluded from normal traffic


This alarm can occur for:

1. Trunks on the DTU-BA or DTX-I. It means that the signal on the trunk is too bad; thetrunk is excluded from normal traffic.

2. The D-channel on the DTU-PH. It means that the 'data link protocol' has failed. Alltrunks on the DTU-PH are excluded from normal traffic.


In case of the alarm occurs for:

1. A trunk on the DTU-BA or DTX-I, then:

a : Check the line e.g. - Board connector;- Cable might be too long;- Check line signal.

b : DTU-BA or DTX-I might be faulty.

2. The D-channel on the DTU-PH:

a : If there are alarms 1048 for the board, then perform the maintenance actions for1048. Ignore alarm 1052 until the alarms 1048 disappear.

b : If there are no alarms 1048 for the board, then the system will try to re-establishthe link. If this is successful, then alarm 1052 will disappear, else the data linkprotocol needs to be checked for errors.




Output Device Absent


The system has output data for an application, for example toll ticketing, but the device toreceive it, for example a printer, has not been connected to the CPU.

For toll-ticketing output this alarm is generated only when the internal buffer is filled formore than 80%. The alarm is cleared when the buffer has been emptied to a filling levelbelow 60%. There is, therefore, only an indirect relation between the alarm and a devicebeing connected or not.

The output data is buffered. If the buffer is full, additional data is lost.


1. Connect the device as soon as possible, to avoid loss of data.Ensure beforehand that the baud rate of the system and the device are the same.

2. If the alarm is raised while the device is connected, verify the correct working of thechannel.




SOPHO SystemManager (SSM) Fault

Error type : *EHWA : 00000ZZ : *AR : No

* Refer to the SOPHO SystemManager Customer Engineer Manual.

The connected SOPHO SystemManager has generated an alarm.

MAINTENANCE ACTIONS

1. Check the SOPHO SystemManager and its interface to the system.



ALARM CODE: 1066ERROR TYPE: 00,10,20,30,80,90,95

SOPHO SystemManager Communication Failure

Error type : 00 = SOPHO SystemManager communication failure or SOPHOSystemManager absent (ZZ = link number)

10 = Not enough memory to completely start a switching service (ZZ= degree to which the service started)

20 = Management functions/CPU mismatch30 = SOPHO SystemManager can not handle a service (ZZ =

service number)80 = Remote Session 4 x wrong password90 = Remote Alarming, no connection95 = Remote Toll Ticketing, no connection

EHWA : 00000ZZ : Link grade or service numberAR : No

ALARM SEMANTICS:

The system has found an error in the communication with an external device (a SOPHOSystemManager or a remote service device).


00ZZ : 1. Connect the SOPHO SystemManager as soon as possible to avoid loss ofinformation. Ensure that the baud rate of the system and the SOPHOSystemManager are the same.

2. Ensure that the cable to the SOPHO SystemManager is connected.3. Check the SOPHO SystemManager. If serviceable, replace the cable to the

system.

10ZZ : Decrease the number of switching services20-- : Reset the number of switching services by system warmstart30ZZ : SOPHO SystemManager fault. Consult relevant documentation.80-- : Verify that remote connect attempt was authorised.90-- : Verify that : - Modem is connected to CMS90 and is operational;

- Remote Set Up parameters are correct;- Remote Service center is available.

95-- : See 90--.




Clock Supply Warning

Error type : --EHWA : 10360 (iS3010) PMC

10760 (iS3030) PMC01760 (iS3050) PMC01360 (S250) CSN11360 (S1000) CSN01960 (iS3050) CSN

ZZ : --AR : Yes


1. Check if the Primary Rate (2MB/s) or Basic Access links are according the projectingparameter 4180 and the signal group data (Basic Access only).

2. Check the cables between PMC and DTUs or CSN and DTUs.




PCT Warning

Error type : 00 = Service degradation warningEHWA : XXXXX = PCTZZ : --AR : No

During startup of an intelligent terminal, it is detected that the terminal does not support allfeatures offered by the system.


Consult specification of the terminal and system to know which features will not work.Decide if lack of these features is acceptable. If not replace the terminal with a moreintelligent type.



13.3. USER COMPLAINTS

The following information consists of guidelines for the pinpointing of faults which are notautomatically alarmed, but are detected by users (including the operators).

Always deal first with any alarms!See ”Actions in Case of Alarm”.

In the guidelines which follow it is assumed that the problem does not originate from thetelephone sets or the connections between the telephone sets and the system MainDistribution Frame (MDF).In case of doubt, use a spare telephone set which is 100 % serviceable, connected directlyto the MDF Analogue Line Circuit (ALC) block by means of an MDF test plug. This test plugcauses the line to be disconnected. Ensure that there is a reliable ground connectionbetween the telephone set and system ground for the enquiry button.

13.3.1. Extension Users

COMPLAINT: NO DIAL TONE - USING A ROTARY DIAL SET OR A KEYTONE SET

Possible causes:

- In case of complaint "No dial tone, also after repeated attempts":. Analogue Line Circuit (ALC) defective (loop detection, transmission path);. Circuit not in service.

- In case of complaint "Sometimes no dial tone":. The dial tone generator on the PMC is defective;. Intermittent fault on the ALC(s) concerned.

ACTIONS:

If the complaints are related only to one ALC board, then follow Actions A1 to A6. If thecomplaints are related to extensions distributed over two or more ALC printed wiringboards, then follow Action B1. (See project data print-out, or use OM command.)

A1. Determine the position of the ALC printed wiring board concerned.

A2. Ensure that the ALC printed wiring board and front connector are pushed firmly homeand make a visual check of the relevant MDF connections.

A3. Check the service condition of the ALC circuit. It should be In Service-No Owner (INS-NO) when the telephone handset is on-hook, and In Service-Call Processing 2 (INS-



CP02) when off-hook. Check this condition using OM 7030 to display the servicecondition, and asking the extension user to lift and replace the handset.

A4. If the above mentioned service conditions cannot be achieved then set the ALC boardto Out of Service (OUT) using OM 7012. Then set the ALC board to In Service (INS)using OM 7010.

Now repeat the service condition check, Action 3.

A5. If no improvement, replace the ALC printed wiring board in accordance with Chapter14.

A6. If no improvement, then re-check the above results by means of a more carefulinvestigation (if necessary replace the cable between the ALC board and the MDF).

B1. The complaints are related to extensions connected to various ALC printed wiringboards. Replace the PMC in accordance with chapter 14.

COMPLAINT: DIALLING NOT POSSIBLE (CONTINUOUS DIAL TONE)

Possible causes:

- In case of impulse telephone set (in systems with or without Receiver/Sender forKeytone/Dial tone (RST-KD):. Analogue Line Circuit (ALC) defect (loop detector does not detect short loop

interruptions).

- In case of keytone telephone set (in systems with or without RST-KD):. ALC defect (transmission path defective).. One of the Receiver Key Tones (RKTs) is defective.

ACTIONS:

1. Execute a manually controlled test on all RKTs (in circuit condition INS). If an RKT isreported defective and it is located on the PMC, replace the PMC printed wiring board inaccordance with Chapter 14. If an RKT is reported defective and it is located on theRST-KD, replace the RST-KD printed wiring board in accordance with Chapter 14.

2. If complaints are linked to one or more extensions connected to the same ALC printedwiring board, replace the ALC printed wiring board in accordance to chapter 14.



COMPLAINT: NO LONG-DISTANCE OR INTERNATIONAL DIAL TONE (ALSO FOROPERATOR) - IN COUNTRIES WITH PUBLIC EXCHANGE 2ND DIAL TONE

Possible causes:

- Incomplete project data.- Public Exchange does not give 2nd dial tone (on one or more lines).- Receiver Dial Tone does not detect the 2nd dial tone (from one or more exchange lines).

Note: The last two mentioned causes are under the assumption that the Project dataspecifies: synchronisation with Public Exchange dial tones for dial tonesregenerated by the system to the caller.

ACTIONS:

1. Ensure that the project data part for the External Numbering scheme is complete

2. Verify the exchange lines (trunk group and line number, circuit conditions).

3. If Project Engineering data and the line conditions are in order, replace the PMC inaccordance with chapter 14.

COMPLAINT: NO DIAL TONE AFTER PRESSING ENQUIRY BUTTON

Probable cause: ALC printed wiring board defective (Ground detectors, Inbus hardware).(In case of loop-interrupt button, ensure that actual loop-interrupt time is within the PE dataspecification.)

ACTION:

Replace the ALC printed wiring board concerned, in accordance with the instructions inchapter 14.

COMPLAINT: EXTENSION DOES NOT RING

Probable cause: ALC printed wiring board defect (Ringing relay, Outbus hardware).

ACTION:

Replace the ALC printed wiring board concerned, in accordance with the instructions inchapter 14.



COMPLAINT: WRONG DESTINATION

Possible causes (Direct Dialling In (DDI) and Transit connections not taken into account):

- If related with internal destinations:. In case of impulse telephone set:

ALC loop-monitor is not detecting loop interruptions properly.. In case of keytone extension.

Receiver Keytone (RKT) is not working properly.

- If related with external destinations:. In case of impulse or loop signalling on the trunk line group concerned:

The impulse circuitry in one or more Trunk Units is not functioning correctly.. In case of keytone signalling on the trunk line group concerned:

Sender Keytone (SKT) is not working properly.

ACTIONS:

If the problem occurs only with external destinations, see action 1or 2.If the problem occurs with both internal and external destinations, see action 3 or 4.

1. External destinations and impulse or loop signalling on trunk line group concerned:Investigate the problem by checking all Trunk Units of the trunk line group, using the testtelephone. If a Trunk Unit is found, check whether the Trunk Unit itself is defective, orwhether there is an external cause (line or distant exchange) by temporarilyinterchanging lines within the trunk line group.

2. External destinations and keytone signalling on trunkline group concerned: If the systemis equipped with an RST-KD, execute a manually controlled test on all SKTs (in servicecondition INS). If an SKT is reported defective, replace the RST-KD board concerned inaccordance with the instructions in chapter 14. The SKTs on the PMC board can only be tested implicit with the RKT test. If the RKTtest is terminated without an error report, than the SKTs are also in order.

3. Internal destinations and impulse telephone set. Replace the associated ALC printedwiring board.

4. Internal destinations and keytone telephone set: Execute a manually controlled test onall RKTs (in circuit condition INS). If an RKT is reported defective, replace the PMC orthe RST-KD printed wiring board concerned in accordance with Chapter 14.



COMPLAINT: NO TICKER TONE (THREE-PARTY CONVERSATION WITHOUTOPERATOR INVOLVEMENT)

Possible causes:

- Add-on and Tone Control (ATC) circuit on the PMC defective.

ACTION:

Replace the PMC in accordance with the instructions in Chapter 14.

COMPLAINT: THREE-PARTY CONVERSATION (WITHOUT OPERATORINVOLVEMENT) DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY

Probably a defect in the Add-on and Tone Generator Control (ATC) circuit on the PeripheralModule Controler (PMC).

ACTION:


13.3.2. Operator

COMPLAINT: ANALOGUE OPERATOR POSITION NO LONGER FUNCTIONS

Possible causes:

- Operator Position has switched over to condition "absent";- Operator Position has been set to circuit condition OUT or NIN;- Data communication with the Operator Position is faulty.

ACTIONS:

1. Set circuit condition to INS.2. Disconnect the handset plug, then plug it in again.3. If no improvement, ensure circuit condition of Operator's Position is INS. EHWA of AOC:

10310, 10311 for S55;10710, 10711 for S255.

4. If no improvement, use one of the other Operator Positions to read out the fault reportsand deal with them in accordance with the instructions in section ”Actions in case ofalarm”.



5. If necessary, test the Operator Position using the "self-test". See Chapter ”diagnostictest”.

COMPLAINT: OPERATOR POSITION REACTS IN AN ABNORMAL WAY

Possible causes:

- One or more "lamps" (LEDs) are defective;- A Number Display is defective;- One or more keys are defective.

ACTION:

Test the Operator Position using the "Self-test". See Chapter ”Diagnostic test”.

COMPLAINT: NO TICKER TONE (THREE-WAY CONVERSATION WITH OPERATORINVOLVED)

Possible causes:

- Add On and Tone Generator Control (ATC) on the PMC defective.

ACTION:


COMPLAINT: THREE-WAY CONVERSATION (WITH OPERATOR INVOLVED) DOESNOT WORK PROPERLY

Probably a defect in the Add On and Tone Generator Control (ATC) on the PMC, or a faultyAnalogue Operator Card (AOC).

ACTION:

Replace the AOC / PMC in accordance with the instructions in Chapter 14.



COMPLAINT: SOMETIMES THE TAXMETERING REPORTING CALL DOES NOTOCCUR

After termination of an outgoing call for which taxmetering was controlled, no cost-reportingcall occurs.

Possible causes:

- The Public Exchange is not sending taxmetering impulses on one or more exchangelines.

- The Metering Circuit is defective.- Since the Metering Circuit is not on the Analogue Trunk Unit (ATU), either the connection

between the Metering Circuit (MC) card and the ATU is faulty or the ATU is faulty.- Analogue Combination Card (ACC) faulty.

ACTIONS:

1. Determine which exchange line(s) are concerned (trunk group and line number(s), asindicated by the display on the operator position).

2. Convert the trunk group and line number(s) to hardware address(es), by using OMcommand.

3. Replace the ATU or MC board in accordance with Chapter 14. If an ACC with a TrunkUnit is applied, replace the TU or ACC.

4. If there is no improvement, check the exchange line, by temporarily interchanging lineswithin the trunk line group, for example.



13.4. ALARM CODES TABLE

The alarm codes are summarized in table 13.7. (MA, MI and SI stand for Major, Minor andSilent Alarm respectively.)

* alarm level (MA, MI or SI) can be defined in PE data, therefore check PE data to see if the default applies or not.

Table 13.7. Alarm Codes.

ALARMCODE ALARM CODE MEANING DEFAULT

ALARM TYPE NOTES PAGE(S)

1000 Major Alarm Overflow MA 99 13-7

1002 Minor Alarm Overflow MI 99 13-8

1003 Silent Alarm Overflow SI 99 13-9

1005 * Major Alarm External MA 99 2,4 13-10

1006 POM-Memory Error MA 99 13-11

1008 * Major Central Equipment Alarm MA 99 1,2,3 13-12...22

1009 Major, only by system restart recoverable, PM fault MA 01 13-24

1010 Cold Start Done MA 99 13-26

1011 * Warm Start Done SI 99 2 13-27

1013 * Restart Done MI 01 2 13-28

1014 * PE Parameter Error MI 99 2 13-29...33

1015 Emergency bypass function is activated SI 99 13-34

1023 * Garbage Buffer Overflow SI 99 2 13-35

1030 * Minor Alarm External MI 99 2,4 13-36

1040 * Board Fault MI 02 13-37...43

1041 * Intermittent PCT Fault MI 98 2 13-44/45

1042 * PCT Fault MI 99 2,4 13-46...54

1043 * DCC Board Alarm MI 99 13-56

1044 * DCC Board Configuration Alarm MI 99 13-62

1045 * Manually Controlled Test - Error Report MI 99 2,3 13-63

1046 * Manually Controlled Test - Information MI 99 13-64

1048 DTU Alarm MI 98 13-65

1049 DTU-Slip detected SI 99 13-66

1050 * PCT Excluded from Normal Traffic MI 99 2,4 13-67

1051 * PCT Blocked by Dial Tone Time Out MI 99 2,4 13-68

1052 ISDN Trunk(s) excluded from normal traffic MI 99 13-69

1060 * Output Device Absent MI 99 4 13-70

1065 * SOPHO SystemManager (SSM) Fault MI 99 13-71

1066 * SOPHO SystemManager Communication Failure MI 99 13-72

1080 Clock Supply Warning MI 99 13-73

1081 PCT Warning MI 99 13-74

See notes overleaf.



Notes: 1. May mean a total telephony failure.2. Fault Integration possible; see PE data.3. Automatic Recovery carried out for most of the faults.4. Automatic Recovery carried out for all fault.



14. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

The following sections give detailed instructions for the replacement and associated testingof hardware items in an operational exchange. Possible reasons for the replacement are:

- Item is defective/suspect;- Item must be replaced by another version;- Item must be replaced by a more expanded version.

The instructions are of course, also applicable:

- When an item has to be temporarily removed/disconnected.- As general test instructions per type of item, e.g. for the purpose of testing spares

holdings.

14.1. COMPATIBILITY

Before replacing a hardware item of a system, a check must be made to ensure that thepart substituted for the original is a permissible replacement, hence compatible with the restof the system.

Replacement is always permitted when:

- The first 9 digits of the type number of the replacement item are the same as those of theunit being replaced.

- The 10th digit of the replacement item is the same as or higher than that of the item beingreplaced (except for items from any pre-production series for which consecutively 10thand 11th digit combinations 99, 98, 97,... are used).

Replacements which deviate from this rule are only permitted when laid down in theadministration (a list of replacement type numbers for example) of the departmentresponsible for project engineering.

14.2. TESTING SPARES HOLDINGS

For the efficient rectification of faults, it is essential that the spare hardware units held instock are always complete and 100 % functionally tested. Because the boards arefrequently transported, it is important (other than for Peripheral Circuits), to repeat afunctional test from time to time.



14.3. TIME OF REPLACEMENT

Before deciding to make a replacement, the following factors should be considered:

- The inconvenience caused to the user by the existing problem;- The inconvenience that would be caused by the proposed replacement action.

When necessary, effect replacements outside working hours. For example:

- An ALC defect, where one of the other seven ALCs on the printed wiring board mustgenerally not be disturbed (a data line for example).

Replacements and similar operations should always be made in consultation with thesystem operator/manager. They are then also notified in respect of possible new alarms.

14.4. RE-TEST AFTER REPLACEMENT

When a problem has disappeared after replacement of a hardware part, it cannot always beconcluded that the replaced part was the cause of the problem. It is possible that anothercondition has changed simultaneously with the replacement, whether or not as a result ofthe actions of replacement.

For this reason it is recommended that in general the hardware part is not (immediately)sent away for repair, but first set into operational use once again, if possible in a harmlesslocation, but in any case a location where minimum inconvenience is caused to users. Itshould also be ensured that the suspect hardware is subjected to intensive use.

14.5. WRITING OF REPAIR FORM (REPAIR CARD)

When a hardware part is found to be defective, it must be sent for repair. For this purpose itis most important that the detected problem is clearly indicated on a repair form to beattached to the part. In addition to the general administrative details, give the followinginformation:

- Problem : Alarm code and (if applicable) the additional information or a shortdescription of the problem.

- Circuit : Complete hardware address (as given with the alarm code in the caseof alarms).This defines the suspect area in most cases to one of the individualcircuits on the printed wiring board concerned.

- Circumstances : Specific conditions which must exist before the problem manifestsitself.



14.6. UPDATING PROJECT RECORDS

When one or more type numbers change (different 12th digit, ... completely different typenumber) due to replacement(s) within the exchange, this must be noted in the technicalrecords of the exchange concerned.

14.7. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

All replacement procedures follow a basic pattern of five steps. These are as follows:

- Set out of service (service condition OUT);- Remove front cables (as appropriate);- Remove and replace faulty board;- Replace front cables (as appropriate);- Set into service (service condition INS).

This basic pattern can be followed throughout all the procedures, but there are manyexceptions and special cases.A few basic rules apply to all cases:

- Take the necessary precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge. Use for examplegrounded anti static floor mats and/or table mats, be sure to ALWAYS wear a groundedanti statics wrist strap.

- NEVER remove a Peripheral Circuit (PCT) board that is NOT in the OUT or NINcondition. Always check first that the desired OM command was executed to protectagainst errors.

- When putting a PCT-board or piece of equipment back into service (service conditionINS) ensure that it actually goes to INS. This may take some time.

- When a board has more than one front connector, it is advised that they are markedbefore being removed, to avoid confusion. Use labels as necessary.

- When a board has front connections the front connectors should always be removedbefore the board is removed from the shelf.

- When a board is replaced it should be inserted and removed at right angles to the shelfusing the correct tool. This is to ensure that all back panel connections are made orbroken at the same time.

14.7.1. Replacement of PMC

1. Check the number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Remove the faulty board from the shelf.3. Insert the replacement board, a warmstart is carried out.4. Check that the PPU contains the correct software package, if not download the correct

software package.



14.7.2. Replacement of AOC

1. Check the number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Remove the PMC board from the shelf.3. Remove the faulty AOC daughter board from the PMC.4. Plug the replacement AOC daughter board into the PMC board.5. Insert the PMC board into the shelf, a warmstart is carried out.

14.7.3. Replacement of DOC

1. Check the number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Remove the PMC board from the shelf.3. Remove the faulty DOC daughter board from the PMC.4. Plug the replacement DOC daughter board into the PMC board.5. Insert the PMC board into the shelf, a warmstart is carried out.

14.7.4. Replacement of the Alarm Unit

1. Switch off external alarms and ESU.2. Replace alarm unit.

14.7.5. Replacement of VPU

1. Check the type number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Remove the front connectors from the faulty board.3. Remove the faulty board from the shelf.4. Insert the replacement board.5. Replace the front connectors on the new board.

14.7.6. Replacement of CPU

If the running POM data differs from the previously downloaded or last backuped POMdata, because it has been modified by OM, then make a new backup of the Run Time POMdatabase into the Flash EPROM POM memory and copy it to the MPC.

1. Disconnect the primary supply.2. Check the type number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).3. Disconnect the front cables from the board.4. Remove the faulty board from the shelf.5. Insert the replacement board.



6. Reconnect the cables.7. Reconnect the primary supply and a system start up is carried out. This is indicated by

the red LED and the green LED. During a system start up POM database (if present) iscopied from the Flash EPROM POM memory into the Run Time Database RAMmemory.

8. Check that the CPU contains the correct software package.9. If no POM database is available in Flash EPROM POM memory, then download the

previously saved POM data and execute the ”coldstart” procedure. 10. Note any alarms except Coldstart Done (1010).11. Reset all alarms.12. Check that telephone traffic is possible.

14.7.7. Replacement of the VIC

If the running POM data differs from the previously downloaded or last backuped POMdata, because it has been modified by OM, then make a new backup of the Run Time POMdatabase into the Flash EPROM POM memory and do a download.

1. Disconnect the primary supply.2. Check the type number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).3. Disconnect the front cables from the board.4. Remove the CPU board from the shelf.5. Exchange the VIC daughter board.6. Insert the CPU board.7. Reconnect the cables.8. Reconnect the primary supply and a system start up is carried out.9. Note any alarms except Coldstart Done (1010).10. Reset all alarms.11. Check that telephone traffic is possible.

14.7.8. Replacement of Peripheral Circuits

The following Peripheral Circuits are covered by this procedure:

- Receiver/sender for Keytones/Dial tone (RST-KD, RST-KD-02 or RST-KD-03);- Analogue Line Circuits, for the KTLC board see note 1;- Analogue Trunk Units;- Digital Trunk Units.

1. Check the type number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Set the board out of service.3. Remove the front connectors from the board.



4. Remove the board from the shelf.5. Insert the replacement board.6. Set the board into service.7. For ALC-A01 perform the following test:

- Make a call to the connected telephone set (or to a telephone set plugged into theMDF).

- Make a call from the connected extension (or from a telephone set plugged into theMDF).

- During one of these two calls use the enquiry button (twice) to go to and from theenquiry condition (test of the detector; it is not necessary to go any further than thereception of dial tone).

8. Replace the front connectors onto the new board.

Notes: 1) If the KTLC board with 8 PCTs is removed from a shelf while the power is on,there is a chance that the data stored in the RAM is mutilated. To avoid start-up problems it is advised to clear the contents of the RAM. This can be doneby removing and replacing strap X2.1, while the KTLC board is removed fromthe shelf.

2) For the KTLC board with 16 PCTs strap X2.1 should be removed from theboard since the RAM of this board is backed up through the backpanel.

14.7.9. Replacement of MC/MCE OR ESU

1. Check the type number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Set out of service the Analogue Trunk Units (ATUs) and Analogue Line Circuits (ALCs)

connected to the faulty board. (See Office Data manual for details of the appropriateATUs and ALCs).

3. Remove front connectors from the board.4. Remove the board from the shelf.5. Insert the replacement board into the shelf.6. Replace front connectors onto the new board.7. Set into service any ATUs and ALCs, which were set out of service in step 2.

14.7.10. Replacement of the PSU

Replacing PSU will put the system out of operation.

If the running POM data differs from the previously downloaded or last backuped POMdata, because it has been modified by OM, then make new a backup of the Run Time POMdatabase into the Flash EPROM POM memory.



1. Check that the new PSU is compatible (see section 14.1.).Note: A PSU-S can not be replaced by a PSU-ML. A PSU-ML can on a termporary

basis be replaced by a PSU-S.2. Remove the external power supply or mains voltage supply.3. If connectors are mounted at the front side of the PSU: remove them.4. WAIT AT LEAST 5 MINUTES.5. Pull the PSU out of the shelf.6. Insert the new PSU.7. Connect the external DC supply or mains voltage as required. 8. Power up. A warm start is carried out. This is indicated by the red LED and green LED

on the CPU.

For installing the transformer refer to chapter 15.

14.7.11. Replacement of DLCs

• GeneralThe DLC-C board contains hardware to control DLC-D boards.One DLC-C and one DLC-board, should always occupy positions in the same unit group.The master-slave relation of the boards should be defined by projecting procedures.

If in doubt about the DLC-C to DLC-D connections, check them against figure 14.1. Also,the slot number of the DLC-C board must be lower than for any DLC-D board.

DLC-C DLC-D(pos.n) (pos. n+1)

Figure 14.1. DLC-C, DLC-D Connections.

FAA

FAB

FAA

FAB

DLC-I requires no special attention.

• Replacement of DLC-C1. Set the circuits of the DLC-C and the DLC-D boards in the same unit group to OUT.2. Remove all cables.3. Remove the DLC-C board.4. Insert the replacement board in such a way that no connection is made with the

backpanel.5. Connect all cables.6. Put the replacement board in position.7. Wait until the green LED on the DLC-C lights and the red LED extinguishes.8. Set the circuits on the board to INS.



• Replacement of DLC-D1. Set the circuits of the DLC-C and DLC-D boards in the same unit group to OUT.2. Remove the upper cable (FAA) of the DLC-board followed by the lower cable (FAB).

See figure 420.3. Remove the DLC-D board.4. Check the type number of the replacement item (section 14.1.).5. Insert the replacement board.6. Remove the DLC-C board for 5 sec. and put it back, with the frontconnectors

inserted.7. Connect the lower cable (FAB) of the board followed by the upper cable (FAA). See

figure 420.8. Wait until the green LED on the DLC-C lights and the red LED extinguishes.9. Set the circuits on the board to INS.

• Replacement of DLC-I, DTX-I and DLC-U1. Check the number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Follow the same procedure as for DLC-C.

14.7.12. Replacement of the IPHs

1. Check the type number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Set the circuits on the related DTU-board out of service.3. Remove the front connectors from the IPH-boards.4. Remove the IPH-boards from the shelf.5. Insert the replacement IPH-A and IPH-B boards.6. Replace the front connectors onto the new boards.7. Set the circuits on the related DTU-board in service again.

14.7.13. Replacement of LTU

1. Check the number of the replacement item (see section 14.1.).2. Set the circuits on the related DTU-board out of service.3. Remove the front connectors from the board.4. Remove the board from the shelf.5. Insert the replacement board into the shelf.6. Replace the front connectors onto the new board.



15. POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION

15.1. EARTH AND POWER CONNECTIONS

This chapter explains how to:

- Make the earth and power connections;- Install the transformers / rectifier unit;- Install an external power supply.

The SOPHO ISPBX can be powered directly from the mains. It is not possible to adjust therequired voltage for the ISPBX. The power provision must be provided with switch and/or awall-mounted socket. The switch and/or the socket must be located in the same room asthe ISPBX and must also be suitably located near by the ISPBX.

Caution: - Do not connect the power cord to the mains power provision until theinstallation is completed!!

- Be sure that the AC power provision is fused with a value of 16 A or less.- Be sure that the primary voltage of the system matches the local mains

voltage! (See note on transformer for the SOPHO iS3010/3030).

Note: Never shorten the mains cord.

Each cabinet has its individual Power Supply Unit. The transformers can cause very highinrush currents. Dependent of the quality of the mains supply and the fuses, the transformermay blow a fuse at switching on or after a power fail. A proper fuse of 16 A will normallywithstand the inrush current of a single cabinet SOPHO iS3030 with a 800 VA (or less)transformer, even when the mains supply has very low impedance.

Automatic circuit breakers are not recommended, since they are more sensitive to highinrush current than melting fuses. Nevertheless it is advised to test the switching on of theISPBX for a number of times (10x).

The ISPBX is equipped with a 4 V Emergency Battery Unit (EBU). The purpose of the EBUis to prevent loss of project dependent data stored in memory in the event of a systemfailure. The EBU is not to be connected in this stage of the installation but it is advised tocomplete the installation of the system first. In the procedure for the system start up theEmergency Battery must be connected.

The SOPHO iS3010/3030 is designed as safety class 2 equipment and therefore has re-inforced isolation. This means that for the safety, with respect to hazardous voltages on themains supply, no safety ground is required. Nevertheless local requirements ,may demandextra precautions. Therefore be well informed about these requirements and connect the



earth of the system accordingly. The earth connection in the cabinets is a screw connectionpoint which is shown in the following diagrams:

- SOPHO iS3010 . . . . Diagram 330.- SOPHO iS3030 . . . . Diagram 331.- MDF Cabinet . . . . . . Diagram 460.

Diagram 335 shows how to connect the earth and safety earth cables. However, localcountry earth specifications may overrule the rules as shown in diagram 335.

If additional 48 V is required e.g. for the alarm unit (if this unit is not supplied with mainspower!) this voltage can be derived from the PSU by means of a F122 connector. Diagram321 gives the information for terminating this 48 V on the MDF.

In addition diagram 321 can be used if more information is required on the powerconnections on the back panel of the SOPHO iS3010/3030.

15.2. POWERING THE TWO CABINET SOPHO iS3030

If required it is possible to power the cabinets by an external DC supply, this should providepower in case of a mains failure. In that case both cabinets should be powered asdescribed in section 15.5. External Power Supply.

When installing a second cabinet it is best to have separate fuses for both cabinets(separate power groups). The wires of the mains supply in the building must be inaccordance with the 2 fuses (it must be installed by qualified personnel). If this solution istoo expensive, a cheaper alternative may be found in:

- Using a timed relay with delay on operate (delay > 150 msec.). This alternative uses onlyone fuse, the relay takes care of spreading the inrush currents in time, so the fuse doesnot have to withstand them simultaneously. Of course the timed relay has to be installedby qualified personnel too. An example is given in figure 15.1.

- Using a 25 A fuse, provided that the wires of the mains supply in the building are inaccordance with the 25 A fuse.



Figure 15.1. Installing the timed relay for a two cabinet SOPHO iS3030.

Relay

Wallsocket

Wallsocket

MasterCabinet

Delay onoperate

Mains

Switch(Optional)

Main Fuse16 A

SlaveCabinet

15.3. INSTALLING THE TRANSFORMER / RECTIFIER UNIT

Transformers used are:

Table 15.1. Transformers used.

Transformer In combination with? Used in sytems? Secondaryoutputs? Diagram?

300 VA PSU-S and PSU-S02 SOPHO iS3010 1 winding 323500 VA PSU-ML and PSU-ML02 SOPHO iS3010/3030 1 winding 324 or 326660 VA PSU-ML and PSU-ML02 SOPHO iS3010/3030 2 windings 325 or 327800 VA PSU-ML and PSU-ML02 SOPHO iS3030 2 windings 325 or 327

Note : Which connecting diagram is to be used depends on the type of rectifier unitused, because there are two different types of rectifier units. Diagrams 324 and325 are valid for one type of rectifier unit, while diagrams 326 and 327 are validfor another type of rectifier unit. Be sure you consult the correct diagram.

15.3.1. Installing the 300 VA Transformer

The 300 VA transformer used in SOPHO iS3010 should be installed according diagram 323as follows:

1. Disconnect the mains power.

2. Make sure you have sufficient space in the PSU compartment to be able to replacethe transformer. If not, take out the nearest PCB board(s) for sufficient space.

3. Position the transformer as shown in diagram 323. Be sure the two notches at theback of the transformer match in the cabinet and fasten the bolt.



4. Connect the two faston connectors of the transformer to the backpanel as shown indiagram 321 and 323. The wires may be exchanged.

5. Lead the mains cord through the ferrite ring (5 windings) and bind the ferrite ringagainst the cabinet frame by means of a tie-wrap as shown in diagram 323.

6. Connect the mains power.

15.3.2. Installing the 500 VA Transformer

If the 500 VA transformer is used in SOPHO iS3010/3030, then install it according diagram324 or 326 (depends on the rectifier unit type used) as follows:



3. First connect the transformer to the rectifier unit outside the cabinet as shown indiagram 324/326. The transformer wires to be connected to the rectifier unit may beexchanged. Place the capacitor against the rectifier plate by means of an adhesivedisk, as shown in the diagrams.

4. Position the transformer and rectifier unit assembly in the cabinet as shown indiagram 324/326, this may take some force. Be sure the two notches at the back ofthe transformer match in the cabinet and fasten the two bolts.

5. Connect the two faston connectors of the rectifier unit to the backpanel as shown indiagram 321 and 324/326. The faston connectors may not be exchanged, the red wireis + and the blue wire is -.

6. Lead the mains cord through the ferrite ring (5 windings) and the rectifier plate asshown in diagram 324/326.


15.3.3. Installing the 660 VA and 800 VA Transformers

The 800 VA is used in SOPHO iS3030 and 660 VA is used in both the systems SOPHOiS3010/3030 and should be installed according diagram 325 or 327 (depends on therectifier unit type used) as follows:





3. First connect the transformer to the rectifier unit outside the cabinet as shown indiagram 325/327. The transformer wires of the same colour should be taken togetherand connected to the rectifier unit. Place the capacitor against the rectifier plate bymeans of an adhesive disk, as shown in the diagrams.

4. Position the transformer and rectifier unit assembly in the cabinet as shown indiagram 325/327, this may take some force. Be sure the two notches at the back ofthe transformer match in the cabinet and fasten the two bolts.

5. Connect the two faston connectors of the rectifier unit to the backpanel as shown indiagram 321 and 325/327. The faston connectors may not be exchanged, the red wireis + and the blue wire is -.

6. Lead the mains cord through the ferrite ring (5 windings) and the rectifier plate asshown in diagram 325/327.


15.4. POWER CONSUMPTION AND FUSES

Following table shows the typical power consumption.

Table 15.2. Power Consumption.

SYSTEM

Typical Power Consumption [W]

Idle 0,4 Erlang/Extension

0,7 Erlang/Extension

MaximumPower

Consumption[VA]

SOPHO iS3010 (48 analogue extensions) 20 70 80 300 or 500

SOPHO iS3030 (160 analogue extensions) 40 200 250 660

The internal DC power provision is fused in the power supply. The PSU-S (02) and thePSU-ML (02) are provided with fuses for the 48 V DC power provision to the shelves. Thefuses are accessible at the front side of the PSUs. The power supply is provided with alabel which gives information on the fuses. Each fuse is equipped with a LED which lights ifthe related fuse is blown.

The 'OK' LED at the bottom of the PSU lights when all voltages are present. When the 'OK'LED not lights, usually one of the fuses is blown. All fuses have the same values: 3,15 A



fast blow, high current breaking capacity. Figure 15.2. gives an overview of the PSU fusesand the board positions they fuse.

Figure 15.2. Front Layout of the PSU-ML and PSU-ML02.

PSU-ML

PSU-ML02

GND -48V4

F122-48V

(Outputs to MDF) 'OK' LED

F122-48V

(Outputs to MDF) 'OK' LED

-48V4

-48V1

-48V0

191

Means signalling voltage connector

for ATU-ST02/12/26.

-48V2

-48V3

Means fuse

-48V0

191

Means F122 connector position

-60V0V

a a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaa

a a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaa

a a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaa Means LEDa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a






Distribution of -48 V to the Board positions.

SUPPLIED TO BOARDPOSITIONS IN SOPHO

iS3010

SUPPLIED TO BOARDPOSITIONS IN SOPHO

iS3030

001, 002 001, 002, 003, 004

003, 004 005, 006, 007, 008

104, MDF via the F122 108, 109, MDF via the F122

front connector (see note) front connector (see note)

101 009, 010, 101, 102

102, 103

103, 104, 105, 106, 107

including power supply for

the operator position

For ATU-ST02/12/26 For ATU-ST02/12/26

-48V1

-48V4

-48V2

-48V3

-60V

Note : - 48V4 group is not filtered and should be taken into account when using -48 Vfrom these positions.

15.5. EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

If required it is possible to connect an external DC supply to the SOPHO iS3010/3030systems. This external DC supply should supply power for normal operation in the event ofa mains failure.

The external DC supply is not supported by Philips Communication Systems organisationand should be purchased by the customer. The external DC supply should have thespecifications as mentioned below.



Note : If an external power supply is used, Philips cannot guarentee that the externalpower supply will meet the appropriate safety and EMC requirements.

Caution : It is not allowed to connect the external power supply if the internal powersupply is still active. When using an external power supply, then thetransformer and the external rectifier, if any, must be disconnected from thesystem.

In case only a transformer (48-62 Hz) and bridge rectifier unit is used:

- Transformer nominal output voltage : 42.5 V (RMS)- Maximum DC voltage after bridge rectifier : 61 V

Required power figures can be derived from table 15.1. Power Consumption.

In any other case:

- U : 51 V (- /+9 V);- I-average : 7 A for SOPHO iS3010;

: 13 A for SOPHO iS3030 per cabinet.- I-switch-on : Depends on the properties of the external supply in combination

with input capacitance of - PSU-S (02) : 15 000 µF;- PSU-ML (02) : 45 000 µF.

- Allowed ripple : <1,2 mV Physophometrically weighted at 800 Hz;: < 10 mV-top for frequencies > 3400 Hz.

- Max. DC power interruption time : 5 ms;

Note : To comply with the ripple specification the positive contribution of the inputcapacitance of the PSUs may be taken into account.- PSU-S (02) : 15 000 µF;- PSU-ML (02) : 45 000 µF.

The external DC box should be connected to the backpanel by means of two fastonconnectors (+ 2 isolation sleeves) according diagram 321. The ordering numbers are:

Faston connector - 2422 015 14263 (Philips number);- 1-160304-8 (AMP number).

Isolation sleeve - 2422 034 18203 (Philips number);- 926539-1 (AMP number).

Note : Special mounting tool is required for assembling the connector for the externalDC box.





APPENDIX AA. FRONT CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY

A.1. PREPARING THE 8X2 TWISTED CABLE


1 Remove the outer cable covering leaving free 80 mm or more of the inner wires.See figure A.1.

2 Separate and untwist wire pairs. Normally cable pairs 1...4 and 5...8 have its ownside of the connector.

A.2. PREPARING THE MULTI COAX CABLE


1 Remove the outer cable covering leaving free 80 mm or more of the inner wires.See figure A.1.

2 The coax shield of the 8 wires can only be removed using a special tool. This tool isnot included in the tool set.

3 Eight common shield wires are used for connector assembling. The rest can be cutoff.

A.3. USING THE PIERCE INSERTION TOOL (Wire insertion)


See diagram 160 for the insertion tool parts.

Note : Each insertion tool is set in proper conditions before leaving the factory.

1 Mount the insertion tool on the edge of the table for efficient handling and operation,using the table clamp.

2 Separate wire pairs 1...4 and 5...8, and position the cable in the cable clamp asshown in diagram 161 for 8x2 for twisted pair cable or diagram 162 for 8 x coaxcable.

9412 DB-A 9150e-35 A-1© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1994. All rights are reserved.



3 Cable positioning

8x2 twisted wire cableThe 8x2 twisted wire cable is fit in the clamp in horizontal position. Shift the 8x2twisted wire cable as far as the cable cover end ”hits” the arrow on top of theinsertion head as shown in diagram 161.

Coax cableThe coax cable is fit in the clamp in vertical position. Leave 10 mm between theouter cable covering and the locating block as shown in diagrams 160 and 162.

4 Determine that the cable colours match with the connector numbering.

5 If you want to start with cable pair 1, then insert the connector into the insertionhead as shown in diagram 161. The pin numbers 101...108 of the connector shouldnow face the wire guiding gap.

6 Shift the connector, from left to right , in the insertion head until you hear the firstclick. To confirm the correct contact cavity position: the right-end of the connectorshould be in line with the connector position mark.

Caution : Once in the insertion head, the connector should be shifted accordingthe direction of the arrow (according the diagrams: from left to right)only. Do not shift in the opposite way, this may damage the tool.

7 Check that the connector and the cable are positioned correctly, before proceedinginstallation.

Wire insertion

8 Select the individual wire and pull it into the wire slot in such a way that the wire ispositioned after the wire positioning hook.

9 Guide the wire underneath the insertion head and straighten the wire by a slightforce, holding the wire between the thumb and the direction finger.

10 Squeeze the hand lever till the end. The wire now should be inserted into thecontact slot.

11 Releasing the hand lever, the connector moves to the next contact cavity.

A-2 DB-A 9150e-35 9412© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1994. All rights are reserved.



12 Repeat the above operations for each individual wire till the whole contact row isinserted.

13 In case the connector has to be wired selectively: Each squeeze-release action ofthe hand lever moves connector to the next contact cavity.

For each connector contact that should be left empty, one squeeze-release actionof the hand lever should be carried out without a wire.

14 If a visual inspection is required during the installation pull the connector out of theinsertion head, shifting from left to right only!

15 After the first contact row is installed, pull out the connector and turn it over 180degrees. Bear in mind step 6. The empty contact row (pin numbers 301...308) isnow facing the wire guiding gap.

16 Repeat all the steps as described above starting with wire pair 5.

17 Take out the connector after inserting the last wire. Bear in mind step 6.

A.4. USING THE CLAMPING TOOL (Connector assembling)


1 Mount the connector covers by hand according diagram 165. This should be doneto keep the assembly together, before inserting into the assembly tool.

2 Having assembled the connector covers, insert the complete assembly, as far as itshifts, in the head of the assembly tool according diagram 165.

3 Squeeze the hand lever till the end and release it. Now the connector should beready for use.

A.5. WHEN THE INSERTION TOOL GETS STUCK

In case something went wrong and the connector is stuck in the connector insertion gap,then it is not possible to squeeze the hand lever till the end. In that case turn the screw forloosening the insertion punch to the left only (according the arrow). This action shouldrelease the insertion punch and you can take out the connector, which might be broken.

9412 DB-A 9150e-35 A-3© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1994. All rights are reserved.


Figure A.1. Cable preparation.

80 mm

80 mm

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

aaaaaa

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

aaaaa

outer cable covering *coax shield *isolation layer *isolation layercoax core

common shieldwires

8 x 2 cable

8 x coax cable

* 80 mm to be stripped of

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaa

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

A.6. RE-ADJUSTING THE INSERTION TOOL

Each insertion tool is set in proper conditions before leaving the factory. A minimum ofadjustment is required during life time.

Re-adjustment should be carried out only if during installation, the individual wires aresliding away in the wire guide after the wire was cut. In that case the pressure on the wirehas to be re-adjusted. This should be done by means of the wire guiding gap adjustmentscrews as shown in diagram 160.

Factory setting of the gap is 0.2 mm.

Caution : Be sure that after re-adjusting the wire gap is not completely closed. Closingthe gap completely would cause damage.

A-4 DB-A 9150e-35 9412© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1994. All rights are reserved.


APPENDIX BB. S0-INTERFACE

B.1. INTRODUCTION

The DLC-I board provides 7 and the DTX-I provides 15 basic rate (2B+D) connections,each of which can be used as an S0 bus (2B+D S0-interface, 4-wire, 192kbps) to whichdifferent ISDN terminals may be attached. Each B-channel has a circuit number (2 to 15 forDLC-I, 2 to 30 for DTX-I). One S0 bus has two B-channels (0 and 1) with two adjacentcircuits for example 2&3. Channel B0 always has an even numbered circuit. A DNR can beassigned to each circuit and, thus, to each B channel. This is the so-called ”Port OrientedISDN”: each B-channel has a DNR allocated to it.

At present, two types of basic rate terminals can be connected to a DLC-I and DTX-I: the Pterminals and the 1TR6 terminals.

B.2. P TERMINALS

These are similar to the SOPHO-SET S terminals which are in use with the DLC-C/D/Uboards and they use the Terminal Message Protocol (TMP) network layer protocol on theS0 bus.

The following types of P terminals are available:

- SOPHO-SET P375D;- SOPHO-SET P375;- SOPHO-SET P370D;- SOPHO-SET P370;- SOPHO-LAM P375.

P terminals can be connected to a, DTX-I, DLC-I, but also to a DLC-C/D or DLC-U via aPNT1, see figure B.1. The P terminal concept applies the proprietary Terminal MessageProtocol, which is already in use in the ISPBX to communicate with digital terminals onDLC-C/D/U boards. There are no translations to/from other types of protocols.

The P terminal is connected to the S0 bus of either the PNT1, DTX-I or the DLC-I. The userwill not notice any difference in operation.

The PNT1 has two interfaces:

- a 2 wire 2B+D Us-interface of 152 kbps connected to a DLC-C/D/U;- a 4 wire 2B+D S0-interface of 192 kbps to which one or two P terminals may be

connected.

9412 DB-A 9150e-35 B-1© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1994. All rights are reserved.


Figure B.1. P Terminal Connection.

DLC-C/Dor

DLC-U

ISPBX

TMP DLC-Ior

DTX-IISDN 2B+DS0-interface,

4-wire, 192 kbps

PTERMINAL

TMPTMP

ISDN 2B+DS0-interface,

4-wire, 192 kbps

ISPBX 2B+DUs-interface,

2-wire, 152 kbps

PTERMINAL PNT1

The 2B+D connection allows a choice of two B channels per S0 bus - channel 0 andchannel 1. This 0 and 1 are used as the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI). Users of a Pterminal must allocate a TEI value which is stored in the terminal. When no value has beenallocated, the default TEI will be used; see table B.1.

Table B.1. Default TEI Values for P Terminals.

P TERMINALNUMBER OF B

CHANNELSDEFAULT TEI

SOPHO-SET P375D 2 0&1

SOPHO-SET P375 1 0

SOPHO-SET P370D 2 0&1

SOPHO-SET P370 1 0

SOPHO-LAM P375 1 1

In general, B channel 0 is used for voice and B channel 1 is used for data. For P terminalsthis can be changed by changing the TEI setting. This setting is changed at the terminalitself, see the relevant Customer Engineer Manual.

For example, a SOPHO-LAM is a data terminal and normally uses B channel 1; its defaultTEI is 1. If this TEI is changed to 0, it will use B channel 0 for its data connections. Whenthe default setting (0&1) of either the SOPHO-SET P375D or SOPHO-SET P370D ischanged into either setting 0 or setting 1, the data port of that terminal will be inactive.

When a P terminal is connected to the S0 bus it will occupy the B channel belonging to itsTEI as soon as it becomes operational. The channel becomes permanently occupied andcannot be used by other terminals on the bus.

B-2 DB-A 9150e-35 9412© Philips Communication Systems B.V. 1994. All rights are reserved.


The S0 bus will be activated as soon as at least one of its B channels is put into service.The S0 bus will be completely functional only when both of the B channels have been putinto service. After activation of the S0 bus, the PPU will wait for a specified time for theresponse of connected P terminals. If no P terminals are present, the PPU will assume thata 1TR6 terminal is connected to the S0 bus.

B.3. 1TR6 TERMINALS

The 1TR6 Terminals are specifically designed to be used with a 1TR6 network and theyuse a 1TR6 protocol on the S0 bus. The DLC-U, DLC-I or DTX-I makes a mapping to theISPBX internal ISDN standard (based on Euro-ISDN): the SIG-protocol. This SIG-protocolis translated by the PPU into the TMP protocol.

In the ISPBX the 1TR6 basic rate terminal can be connected to the S0 bus as follows (seefigure B.2.):

- Directly to a DLC-I or DTX-I board;- Via PNT1, release 2 to a DLC-U.

Figure B.2. 1TR6 Terminal Connection.

DLC-Ior

DTX-I

DLC-UTMP1TR6

1TR6

ISPBX


4-wire, 192 kbps

1TR6TERMINAL


4-wire, 192 kbps

ISPBX 2B+DUs-interface,

2-wire, 152 kbps

1TR6TERMINAL

PNT1(rel. 2)

Following 1TR6 terminals are available:

- SOPHO-SET P171 also called the ”Digital Ordinary Telephone” (DOT);- SOPHO-SET P271 also called the DOT+;- SOPHO-SET I385 (ISDN).

Note: A maximum of two SOPHO-SET P171 and four SOPHO-SET P271 terminals maybe connected to an S0-Bus.



The users of 1TR6 terminals without automatic TEI assignment should not use TEI values 0or 1 for their terminals because it will cause the DLC-U, DLC-I or the DTX-I to start TMPprotocol instead of 1TR6 protocol. 1TR6 terminal users should allocate a correct EndgeräteAuswahl Ziffer (EAZ) which is stored in the terminal.

For calls from the 1TR6 terminal, the B channel - EAZ relation is:

- EAZ setting 2 : 1TR6 terminal uses B channel 0 (even EHWA).- EAZ setting 3 : 1TR6 terminal uses B channel 1 (odd EHWA).- Other EAZ : 1TR6 terminal uses B channel 0 or 1, depending on the presence of P

terminals on the same bus, or on the requested service.

For calls to the 1TR6 terminal, the B channel - EAZ relation is:

- 1TR6 terminal uses B channel 0 (even EHWA):EAZ=2 is sent to the terminal.Terminal with EAZ setting 2 or 9 will accept the call.

- 1TR6 terminal uses B channel 1 (odd EHWA):EAZ=3 is sent to the terminal.Terminal with EAZ setting 3 or 9 will accept the call.

In general, EAZ setting 9 is used for accepting calls with any EAZ value.

B.4. S0 BUS RESTRICTIONS

There are a number of restrictions when connecting the P and 1TR6 terminals on the sameS0 bus; see table B.2.

WARNING : When an additional terminal is connected to the S0 bus the resultantdisruption caused on the S0 bus might result in loss of data in an existingdata session running on an other terminal on the same S0 bus. To avoidthis situation be sure that the terminal(s) on the same S0 bus are idle.



Table B.2. S0 Bus Restrictions.

S0 BUS CONFIGURATION RESTRICTIONS

P terminal (1) using B0P terminal (2) using B1

It is not possible to use 1TR6 terminals on that bus because both channelsare permanently in use. Both the SOPHO-SET P375D and P370D use bothchannels. Thus 1TR6 terminals cannot be used on the same bus.

P terminal using B01TR6 terminals not sending

EAZ=2

The P terminal occupies B channel 0 so all calls made by 1TR6 terminals willbe routed to B channel 1, irrespective of the requested service.

P terminal using B11TR6 terminals not sending

EAZ=3

The P terminal occupies B channel 1 so all calls made by 1TR6 terminals willbe routed to B channel 0, irrespective of the requested service.

1TR6 terminals not sendingEAZ=2 or EAZ=3

During a call to the S0 bus it is possible that all 1TR6 terminals respond,although only one can fully support the requested service. The serviceBildtelefon (Videophone) with EAZ setting 9 requires this configurationbecause it uses B channel 0 for ton (sound) and B channel 1 for bild (video).

1TR6 terminal with EAZ=21TR6 terminal with EAZ=3

Calls from the terminal with EAZ=2 will use B channel 0 and calls from theterminal using EAZ=3 will use B channel 1. This configuration will berequired when two 1TR6 terminals with the same service are connected tothe bus.

B.5. CABLING S 0 BUS

The S0 bus consists of 2 balanced twisted pairs with one pair for each direction: transmitand receive. The distance between the SOPHO-SET and the ISPBX depends on theconfiguration and the cable characteristics of the cable used between the wall socket andthe Main Distribution Frame (MDF) of the ISPBX.Typical cable characteristics are given in table B.3.

Table B.3. S0 Bus Specification.

S0 BUS SPECIFICATION

Cable impedance 100 Ω at 96 kHz

Wire diameter 0.5 mm

Loop attenuation < 10 dB / km at 96 kHz

Round trip delay < 1 µsec / 100 m

Bit error rate < 10-7

Figures B.3. and B.4. illustrate the various configurations. The distances given do notinclude the length of the SOPHO-SET line cord: this length is normally 6 m.

When using another cable, the length must be <10 m.



Both twisted pairs must be terminated (preferably in the wall socket) with a 100 Ω resistoron the location indicated in figures B.3. and B.4.

WARNING 1: - When using a cable with characteristics other than the ones listed in tableB.3. the distances mentioned above are different.

- An intermediate MDF in the connection can also affect the overall cablecharacteristics.

- Additional attenuation,caused by joints, occurs when cables are connectedtogether.

When the SOPHO-SET is connected via a PNT1 to a DLC-A, B, C, D or U in the ISPBX thedistance can be extended by 1500 m. In that case the attenuation of the cable usedbetween the PNT1 and DLC may not exceed 15 dB (at 100 kHz, without noise insertion).

There are two reasons for using the PNT1--DLC-C/D/U combination:

- in configurations where the terminals are located beyond the maximum distance allowedby the S0-interface: the PNT1 extends the distance between terminal and ISPBX by 1500m.

- in situations where the existing 2-wire cabling does not allow for the connection of 4-wireISDN terminals.

WARNING 2: When the SOPHO-SET P is connected to the PNT1 S0 bus not using thestandard line cord but using a longer cable (and extra wall socket), that cablemust be terminated by a 100 Ohm terminator over the two transmit wires anda 100 Ohm terminator over the two receive wires in the wall socket; in thePNT1 the resistors R1.7 and R1.8 must be disconnected by de-solderingsolder pad X2.2 and X2.4 as illustrated in figure B.5.When the SOPHO-SET P is directly connected to the PNT1 S0 bus all foursolder pads bust be soldered through; when no cable termination is wantedall four solder pads must be de-soldered (open).



The distances mentioned are only valid when cables with the characteristics given in table B.3. are used.

Figure B.3. Possible Wiring Configuration and Distances.

DLC-C/D/U

DLC-C/D/U

DLC-C/D/U

DLC-C/D/U

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

MDF ISPBX

direct connections using thestandard terminal line cord.

PNT1

TERMINAL2

TERMINAL1

point to point

max. 600 m

TERMINAL

extended passive bus

max. 600 m

TERMINAL1

TERMINAL2

y-configuration

max. 500 mTERMINAL

1

TERMINAL2

PNT1max. 1500 m

PNT1

PNT1

max. 1500 m

max. 1500 m

max. 1500 m

= wall socket with 100 Ω terminators.

= wall socket without 100 Ω terminators.

= PNT1 with two of the four 100 Ω resistors disconnected; see figure B.5.



The distances mentioned are only valid when cables with the characteristics given in table B.3. are used.

Figure B.4. Possible Wiring Configuration and Distances.

ISPBX

DLC-Ior

DTX-I

DLC-Ior

DTX-I

DLC-Ior

DTX-I

DLC-Ior

DTX-I

DLC-U

DLC-U

DLC-U

DLC-U

MDF

MDF

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

point to point

max. 600 m

TERMINAL


max. 600 m

TERMINAL1

TERMINAL2

y-configuration

max. 500 mTERMINAL

1

TERMINAL2

TERMINAL2

TERMINAL8

short passive bus

max. 150 m

ISPBX

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

point to point

max. 600 m

TERMINAL


max. 600 m

TERMINAL1

TERMINAL2

y-configuration

max. 500 mTERMINAL

1

TERMINAL2

TERMINAL1

TERMINAL2

TERMINAL8

short passive bus

max. 150 m max. 1500 mPNT1(rel. 2)

max. 1500 mPNT1(rel. 2)



= wall socket with 100 Ω terminators.

= wall socket without 100 Ω terminators.

TERMINAL1



Figure B.5. Location of Solder Pads and 100 Ω Resistors in the PNT1.

MAINSCONNECTOR

S0 CONNECTORSUs CONNECTOR

PNT1 SOLDERING SIDEX2.3

X2.4

X2.1

X2.2

S0 CONNECTORS Us CONNECTOR

PNT1 COMPONENT SIDER1.5

R1.7

R1.6

R1.8

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a








Open : solder pad not soldered through.Closed : solder pad soldered through.

TERMINATIONTRANSMIT

X 2.1 X 2.2RECEIVE

X 2.3 X 2.4

None Open Open Open Open

50 Ω Closed Closed Closed Closed

100 Ω Closed Open Closed Open

B.6. CONNECTORS AND PIN NUMBERING

• Terminal Line CordOn both ends the terminal line cord (maximum length 10 m.) terminates with an eight wayjack. Figure B.6. shows the front view and the pin numbers of the line cord jack.

Figure B.6. Terminal Line Cord Jack.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8TRRT

clip

Legend: 1=not connected2=not connected3=transmit (T) + (from the terminal) and power+4=receive (R) + (into the terminal) and power-5=receive (R) - (into the terminal) and power-6=transmit (T) - (from the terminal) and power+7=not connected8=not connected



• S0-interface Wall SocketThe S0-interface wall socket is a eight pins modular socket; see figure B.7. When theSOPHO-SET is line powered, power provision is done via pin 3&6 (positive polarity) andpin 4&5 (negative polarity) when the power source is in the normal power mode.

Figure B.7. S0-interface Wall Socket.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8RT TR

Legend: 1=not connected2=not connected3=receive (R) + (from the terminal) and power+4=transmit (T) + (into the terminal) and power-5=transmit (T) - (into the terminal) and power-6=receive (R) - (from the terminal) and power+7=not connected8=not connected

Figure B.8. S0 Bus Connectors and Pin Numbers; see also table B.4.

WALLSOCKET

4

5

3

6

F122

301

302

101

102

MDF

5a

5b

1a

1b

DLC-I TERMINAL

T

T

R

R

+

-

+

-

R

R

T

T

+

-

+

-

TRANSMIT

>RECEIVE

>

RECEIVE

<TRANS-MIT

<

Figure B.9. On-Site Cabling.

WALL SOCKET /CONNECTOR PIN NUMBER

3

4

5

6

MDF

1a

1b

5a

5b

DLC-I or

DTX-I

S0 bus 0

circuits 2&3

TERMINAL



Table B.4. S0 Bus Connectors and Pin Numbers.

S0 BUS CIRCUITDLC-I

CONNECTORMDF

BLOCKSIGNAL

MEANING

0 2 & 3

FBA: 101102301302

block 1: 1a1b5a5b

R +R -T +T -

1 4 & 5

FBA: 103104303304

block 1: 2a2b6a6b

R +R -T +T -

2 6 & 7

FBA: 105106305306

block 1: 3a3b7a7b

R +R -T +T -

3 8 & 9

FBA: 107108307308

block 1: 4a4b8a8b

R +R -T +T -

4 10 & 11

FBB: 101102301302

block 2: 1a1b5a5b

R +R -T +T -

5 12 & 13

FBB: 103104303304

block 2: 2a2b6a6b

R +R -T +T -

6 14 & 15

FBB: 105106305306

block 2: 3a3b7a7b

R +R -T +T -

B.7. LINE POWERING

The DLC-I or DTX-I S0 bus offers the combination of the proprietary TMP and the public1TR6 protocol and is therefore referred to as the 'combi-bus'.The TMP protocol and SOPHO-SET P terminals enables full access to the features andapplications offered by the ISPBX. At the same time, support of the 1TR6 protocol meansthat the combi-bus provides the interface for ISDN terminals, for example a group 4 fax, aPC, etc.The possibility to connect two terminals per DLC-I or DTX-I line circuit ensures a moreefficient use of system ports as compared with the current DLC-C/D/U solution.

The power taken from the S0 bus, when only one terminal is connected, is 400 mW at 40V.When the maximum number of terminals is connected, the power taken is 1W at 24V.

The maximum number of terminals which can be powered by the combi-bus depends onthe power consumption of the terminals; see the Customer Engineer manuals for the power



consumption of the SOPHO-SET P37x terminals. Any additional terminal should be mainspowered. Exceeding the maximum number of allowed line powered terminals may result ina shut-down of the bus; normal operation is then only possible for the mains poweredterminals.

Note: Line powering is provided by the DLC-I or DTX-I; no additional LDC is required.

B.8. CONFIGURATION ASPECTS

The 2B+D combi-bus does not support the passive bus concept in the true ISDN way butprovides a similar addressing scheme for combining up to 8 terminals on one and the sameinterface. The main difference is that the combi-bus only allows 2 DNRs and it does notsupport the Multiple Subscriber Numbers as defined by ISDN. The two B channels of thecombi-bus are seen, from a system point of view, as two extension interfaces, each withtheir own DNR. Each B channel can be used to connect either a SOPHO-SET P37x or acluster of 1TR6 terminals.The connection type must be determined in the projecting by assigning a signalling groupnumber to the S0 bus; see table B.5.

Table B.5. DLC-I Signalling Group Number.

CONNECTION TYPE LANGUAGESIGNALLING

GROUP NUMBER

Point-to-point German

English

0904

0906

Extended passive bus German

English

0904

0906

Short passive bus German

English

0905

0907

The terminals within a 1TR6 cluster are sharing the same DNR and act, seen from the userpoint of view, as if they are connected in parallel. The maximum number of terminals percluster is 8.

Note: In case of a SOPHO-SET P37X D (with a data port) both B channels are alreadyoccupied: one for voice and one for data.

The maximum number of terminals that can be connected to the same bus is given in tableB.6. This table shows, the number of SOPHO-SET P terminals and corresponding numberof 1TR6 terminals for each combination; see also figure B.10.



Table B.6. Maximum Number of Terminals on a Combi-bus.

SITUATION SOPHO-SET P 1TR6 TERMINALS

1 2× P37x 02 1× P37x D 03 1× P37x 1 ... 7 (one cluster)4 0 1 ... 8 (two clusters)

Within a given a cluster any arrangement of 1TR6 terminals is possible, for example acluster can consist of two voice telephones, a group 4 fax and a PC.

Terminals in a cluster providing the same service, for example two 3.1 kHz voicetelephones, act as if they were connected in 'parallel'. This means that an incoming call to agiven cluster is signalled at all service compatible terminals. An incoming telefax group 4call is only signalled on all group 4 terminals with the same DNR.

If one terminal within a cluster is off hook, all other terminals are blocked, meaning that theycan neither setup or answer a call.

Figure B.10. Configuration of P and 1TR6 terminals.

DLC-U

DLC-Ior

DTX-I

DLC-U

DLC-Ior

DTX-I

DLC-C/D/U

DLC-Ior

DTX-I

DLC-C/D/U

**

**

*

*

SITUATION 1

SITUATION 2

SITUATION 3

SITUATION 4

P375 /P370

P375 /P370

P375 /P370

ISPBX

CLUSTER 1

1TR6

CLUSTER 1

1TR6

CLUSTER 2

1TR6

P375 D /P370 D

PNT1

PNT1

PNT1(rel. 2)

PNT1(rel. 2)

* : Either DLC-I or DTX-I is used or DLC-U / PNT1 (releases 1 or 2) combination is used.** : Either DLC-I or DTX-I is used or DLC-U / PNT1, release 2 combination is used.

DLC-Ior

DTX-I





FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

PWB FRONT CONNECTOR IDENTITIESDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 100 9209

PIN NUMBERING FRONT VIEW

101 301

108 308


101 301

108 308


308 108

301 101

USING THE ANTI STATIC BRACELETDB-A 9150e-35Diagram 110 9412

CONDUCTIVE BRACELET ORANTI STATIC WRISTWATCH

108

101 301

308108

101

308

301

Connector 1Connector 0

16

6

6

5

5

4

34

2 23

5

1

1

2

432 1

COLOURS OF WIRES DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 120 9412

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a










Colours in the cables as delivered by Philips

COLOUR OF WIRES

a b

COUNTGROUP

WIRE PAIR

WHITE RED 1 1 31 61 91

WHITE BLUE 1 2 32 62 92

WHITE YELLOW 1 3 33 63 93

WHITE GREEN 1 4 34 64 94

WHITE BLACK 1 5 35 65 95

WHITE / RED RED 2 6 36 66 96

WHITE / RED BLUE 2 7 37 67 97

WHITE / RED YELLOW 2 8 38 68 98

WHITE / RED GREEN 2 9 39 69 99

WHITE / RED BLACK 2 10 40 70 100

WHITE / BLUE RED 3 11 41 71

WHITE / BLUE BLUE 3 12 42 72

WHITE / BLUE YELLOW 3 13 43 73

WHITE / BLUE GREEN 3 14 44 74

WHITE / BLUE BLACK 3 15 45 75

WHITE / YELLOW RED 4 16 46 76

WHITE / YELLOW BLUE 4 17 47 77

WHITE / YELLOW YELLOW 4 18 48 78

WHITE / YELLOW GREEN 4 19 49 79

WHITE / YELLOW BLACK 4 20 50 80

WHITE / GREEN RED 5 21 51 81

WHITE / GREEN BLUE 5 22 52 82

WHITE / GREEN YELLOW 5 23 53 83

WHITE / GREEN GREEN 5 24 54 84

WHITE / GREEN BLACK 5 25 55 85

WHITE / BLACK RED 6 26 56 86

WHITE / BLACK BLUE 6 27 57 87

WHITE / BLACK YELLOW 6 28 58 88

WHITE / BLACK GREEN 6 29 59 89

WHITE / BLACK BLACK 6 30 60 90

Location of the count groupsin a cableNote : 1. The first count group 1 is located in the

centre of the cable and it contains atransparant earthing wire

2. The corresponding a and b wires are twisted

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











Colours of wires in a front connector

WIREPAIR

COLOUR

a b

1 RED / BLACK RED

2 BLUE / BLACK BLUE

3 YELLOW / BLACK YELLOW

4 GREEN / BLACK GREEN

5 GREY / BLACK GREY

6 WHITE / BLACK WHITE

7 PINK / BLACK PINK

8 BROWN / BLACK BROWN

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

CABLE STRIPPING DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 121 9412

a aa a

55

INSERTING AND REMOVINGOF A FRONT CONNECTOR DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 122 9412

INSERTING A FRONT CONNECTOR

REMOVING A FRONT CONNECTOR

FLAT CABLE CONNECTING ANDDISCONNECTING DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 123

USING WIRING TOOLDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 130

FIXING COAX CONNECTOR TO CABLEDB-A 9150e-35Diagram 131

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





A *

a=15b=19

a=9b=13

a aa a

B *

a+b5

a+b3

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

6

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

9 C *

a=Cable diameter Ø 3,68

b=Cable diameter Ø 5.6

10

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

11

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a






12

INSERTING AN IC DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 140 9209

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a aa a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

15±0.2

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a aa a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a












a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
















a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a aa a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a















a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a









a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a aa a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a









a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

























a a a

a a a


a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a aa aa aa a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

























a a a

a a a


a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a













a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

REMOVING AN IC DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 141 9209

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
























a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

























a a a a

a a a a

a a a aa a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a











a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a












a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a













a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a











a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a







a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a

















CB

A

CBA

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a

a a aa a a

a a a

*

FIRST ADJUST LEGS * ADJUSTING PLATEA 40 POLB 28 POLC 24 POL

AB

C













a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a









a aa aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a













a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

















a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a


















a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a




























a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a


a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a






































a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a

a a a a


a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

ASSEMBLING OF FLOORSTAND 1DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 150 9412

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a










a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a a a

a a a a


a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a

a aa a

a aa a a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a a a

a a a

a aa a

a aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa

A

A

a aa aa a a

a a a

a aa aa a a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

aa aa a

ASSEMBLING OF FLOORSTAND 1.5DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 152 9412

a aa a

a aa aa a

a aa a

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

a a a a

a a a a

A

a aa aa a a aa a

a aa a

a aa a a aa a

a aa a

a aa a a aa aa a

a aa a

a a a

a a a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

A

a aa aa









a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a aa aa aa aa aa aa aa a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a aa a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a aa aa aa a

a aa a

a a a

a a a

a aa a a aa aa a

a aa a

MASTER

Min. Distance to the wall in front is 80 cm

Min.10cmMax. 900cm

Min. 45cm

Min. 45cm

Min. 45cmMax. 900cm

LOCATING THE TWO CABINETSOPHO iS3030 DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 155 9412

Min. 10cmMax. 125cm

Min. 50cm

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a


























a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a



















a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

SLAVEsee note

Note: Install the 2 cabinets of a SOPHO iS3030 eitherside by side or above one another.

If the cabinet at the left side is anMDF cabinet, then install the MDF cabinetagainst the system cabinet at the right side

SLAVEsee note
















a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a



























PIERCE F122 CONNECTORINSERTION TOOL PARTS DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 160 9209

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

CABLE CLAMP(COAX POSITION CABLE)

LOCATING BLOCK

WIRE POSITIONING HOOK

WIRE GUIDING GAP

WIRE SLOT

INSERTION HEAD

CONNECTORINSERTION GAP

HAND LEVER

TABLE CLAMP

WIRE GUIDING GAPADJUSTMENT

ARROW

CONNECTOR POSITION MARK

(8×2 CABLE POSITION)

CABLE CLAMP

SCREW FOR LOOSENING THEINSERTION PUNCH, IF STUCK(TURN LEFT ONLY)

CONNECTOR

CONNECTING THE 8×2TWISTED PAIR CABLE TO F122 CONNECTORDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 161 9209

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a aa aa a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a













a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

8×2 TWISTED CABLE

USE 6mm ALLEN

KEY FOR THIS SCREW

10mm

CONNECTING THE 8× COAX CABLE TO F122 CONNECTORDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 162 9209

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a aa aa a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a













a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

COAX

USING THE F122 CONNECTORASSEMBLY TOOL DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 165 9209

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a a

a a a a a a a aa a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a a

a a a a aa aa aa aa aa a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

13

2

REMOVING THE COVERDB-A 9150e-35Diagram 300 9412

a aa aa aa aa a

1 2

3

P P P P P P P C DC C C C C C M P LT T T T T T C U C

- /11 12 13 14 15 16 M V L

C I DC C

* or

MC

UG5 UG6 UG7 UG8*UG9

CPU

VIC

PCT6

PCT5

PCT4

PCT3

PCT2

PCT1

TYPICAL SHELF LAYOUT DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 310 9412

UG2

101 102 103 104 105

TRANSFORMER

&

BATTERY

COMPARTMENT

PMC-MC

001 002 003 004 005

UG0 UG1

PSU

101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110

001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011

PCT10

PCT9

PCT8

PCT7

PCT6

PCT5

PCT4

PCT3

PCT2

PCT1

TRANSFORMER,

RECTIFIER

&

BATTERY

COMPARTMENT

PSU-ML

SOPHO iS3010

SOPHO iS3030

UG0 UG1 UG2 UG3 UG4

* = CPU (VIC) is not present in

the slave cabinet. Position

108 in the salve cabinet may

cantain a restricted number of

PCTs

FASTENING OF THE PWB LOCK IN THEEMC CABINETS FOR SOPHO iS3010/3030DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 315 9412

MAINS CORD

a aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa aa aa aa a

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a





















A

B

G

D

F

C

E

PWB LOCK

2

MAINS CORD

S

CABLING OF THE EMC CABINETSFOR SOPHO iS3010/3030DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 316 9412

a aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa a

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

1

CABLE TENSION RELIEF

SOPHO iS3010 EMC CABINETWITHOUT RECTIFIER UNITDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 317 9412

a aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa a

TIE-WRAP

MAINS CORD

MAINS CORD

INSTALLING THE TRUNK FILTERS FORATU-SS02 AND ATU-ST02 (EMC CABINET)DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 318 9412

a aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

INSTALLING THE MAINS CABLE ANDTHE EBU IN A NON-EMC CABINETDB-A 9150e-35Diagram 319 9209

RED

BLACK

5 WINDINGS

CONNECTING AND MOUNTINGTHE EBU IN AN EMCCABINET / MOUNTING V.24 CONNECTORDB-A 9150e-35Diagram 320 9412

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a










a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

1

2

INSTALLING THE EBU IN AN EMC IMPROVED CABINET

POWER CONNECTIONSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 321 9412

+, RED

–, BLUE

–

51 V DC (+/- 9 V)

REDEBU

BLUE

BLUEPOWER

RED

* = Connect here the faston connectors of the transformer in case of no rectifier unit is used.

If rectifier unit is used, connect here the faston connectors of the rectifier unit. Be sure the wire colors(polarities) match.

If an external DC supply is used, connect here the faston connectors of the external DC supply. Besure the polarities match.

** = Reserved for future use.

REAR SIDE POWER COMPARTMENT

(SOPHO iS3010/3030)

- 48 VGND

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

PSU (Connector FCC)

PSU - MDF 48 V connection .(connect only if required, e.g. if alarm unit is

fed with 48 V instead of mains)

/ –/+

*

*

**

**

**

External DC supply

Safety Mains Transformer with rectifier unit (safety class 2)

Safety Mains Transformer only(safety class 2)

+

One of the following 3 power supply combinations can beconnected to the rear side of the power compartment:

300VA TRANSFORMER CONNECTING DIAGRAMDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 323 9412

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a aa a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a aa a

A

a aa aa aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa a

A

TIE-WRAP

500VA TRANSFORMER AND RECTIFIERUNIT CONNECTING DIAGRAMDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 324 9412

RED

BLUE

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

ADHESIVE DISK

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

660VA AND 800VA TRANSFORMER AND RECTIFIER UNIT CONNECTINGDIAGRAMDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 325 9412

RED

BLUE

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

ADHESIVE DISK

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

500VA TRANSFORMER AND RECTIFIERUNIT CONNECTING DIAGRAMDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 326 9412

ADHESIVE DISK

K

AK

A

A

KA

K

RED

BLUE

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

660VA AND 800VA TRANSFORMER AND RECTIFIER UNIT CONNECTINGDIAGRAMDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 327 9505

ADHESIVE DISK

K

AK

A

A

KA

K

RED

BLUE

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

BROWN

GREEN

ROUTING CABLES AND EARTHCONNECTION - SOPHO iS3010DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 330 9412

CABLES TO MDF

CABLES TO MDF

EARTH CONNECTION

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa a a

a a a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

PLUG FOR CONNECTINGANTISTATIC BRACELET

ROUTING CABLES AND EARTHCONNECTION - SOPHO iS3030DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 331 9412

CABLES TO MDF

CABLES TO MDF

EARTH CONNECTION

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a aa aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa a

a aa aa a

a aa a

PLUG FOR CONNECTINGANTISTATIC BRACELET

EARTH CONNECTIONSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 335 9209

When using arrestors in the MDF, thenthis earth connection is mandatory.

= Earth screw

SlaveCabinet

MasterCabinet

Conn.MDF

Disconn.MDF

SlaveCabinet

MasterCabinet

Conn.MDF

Disconn.MDF

Conn.MDF

Disconn.MDF

= Safety earth point

= Ground earth point (e.i. metal pin in the cellar)

Note 1 : Local country earth specifications may overrule the earth connection rules as described in this diagram.Note 2 : At the earth point of the cabinets 3 small screws and 2 big screws are available. For connecting the safety earth use

always one of the big screws.

EARTH CONNECTING DIAGRAM WITHOUT SAFETY EARTH

SAFETY EARTH CONNECTIONS

Same connectionsfor the next MDF.

EXTERNALCABLES

(CONNECTING BLOCKS)

CABLES FROM SYSTEM

(DISCONNECTING BLOCKS)

21

20

40

2

1

JUMPERING MDF - SOPHO iS3010DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 340 9412

3

EARTH CONNECTION

EARTHCONNECTING

BLOCK

EARTHCONNECTING

BLOCKS

40

2

1

JUMPERING MDF - SOPHO iS3030DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 341 9412

3

DISCONNECTING BLOCKS

CONNECTING BLOCKS

EARTH CONNECTION

INSTALLING THE PMC-PMC CABLE AND THEMAINS CABLE IN AN EMC CABINETDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 350 9209

a aa a

a a a

a a a

a aa a

a aa a

SLAVE CABINET

TO SLAVE CABINET

PMC-MC

PMC-MC

FROM MASTER CABINET

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

A

A

A

INSTALLING THE PMC-PMC CABLE IN A NON-EMC CABINETDB-A 9150e-35Diagram 351 9209

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

a a a

B

B

B

PMC-MC

PMC-MC

SLAVE CABINET

TO SLAVE CABINET

FROM MASTER CABINET

LINE CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS AT MDF BLOCKSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 400 9304

PERIPHERALCIRCUIT BOARD

CONNECTOR POSITION ON

PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

ALC-A FBC0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

ALC-E FAD

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FCA8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

DLC-C FCCnot

used

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

DLC-D FCC8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

DLC-UFAD

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FCA8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

not

used

DLC-I

FBARX0

+ -

RX1

+ -

RX2

+ -

RX3

+ -

TX0

+ -

TX1

+ -

TX2

+ -

TX3

+ -

FBBRX4

+ -

RX5

+ -

RX6

+ -

not

used

TX4

+ -

TX5

+ -

TX6

+ -

not

used

DTX-I (7)

FABRX0

+ -

RX1

+ -

RX2

+ -

RX3

+ -

TX0

+ -

TX1

+ -

TX2

+ -

TX3

+ -

FBARX4

+ -

RX5

+ -

RX6

+ -

not

used

TX4

+ -

TX5

+ -

TX6

+ -

not

used

DTX-I

FABRX0

+ -

RX1

+ -

RX2

+ -

RX3

+ -

TX0

+ -

TX1

+ -

TX2

+ -

TX3

+ -

FBARX4

+ -

RX5

+ -

RX6

+ -

RX7

+ -

TX4

+ -

TX5

+ -

TX6

+ -

TX7

+ -

FBDRX8

+ -

RX9

+ -

RX10

+ -

RX11

+ -

TX8

+ -

TX9

+ -

TX10

+ -

TX11

+ -

FCCRX12

+ -

RX13

+ -

RX14

+ -

not

used

TX12

+ -

TX13

+ -

TX14

+ -

not

used

DTA FBCExtension

line

a b

Entrypoint'IN'

a b

Entrypoint'OUT'a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

FAA

FAB

FAC

FAD

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

FAA

FAB

FAC

FAD

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

ANALOG TRUNK CIRCUIT CONNECTIONSAT MDF BLOCKSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 401 9209



PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

ATU(4 CCTs) FBC

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

ATU(6 CCTs) FBC

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

not

used

not

used

ATU(8 CCTs) (8 MCs) (8 ESUs)

FBA0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

ESU0

+ -

ESU1

+ -

ESU2

+ -

ESU3

+ -

FBB4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

ESU4

+ -

ESU5

+ -

ESU6

+ -

ESU7

+ -

ATU-IL(4-wire)

FBC0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

0

c d

1

c d

2

c d

3

c d

ATU-E&M(2-wire)

FBC0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

FCA0

E EE

1

E EE

2

E EE

3

E EE

0

M MM

1

M MM

2

M MM

3

M MM

ATU-E&M(4-wire)

FAD0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

0

c d

1

c d

2

c d

3

c d

FCA0

E EE

1

E EE

2

E EE

3

E EE

0

M MM

1

M MM

2

M MM

3

M MM

ATU-PA FBC

0

a b

1

a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

FCA0

E EE

1

E EE

not

used

not

used

0

M MM

1

M MM

not

used

not

used

ATU-PSI FBCTo ALC

a b

Contact

a b

Microph.

a b

Teleph.

a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

ATU-G(8 CCTs)

FAD 1)Emergency Extension

Connections

Ext. 0

a b

ALC Ext. 0

a b

Ext. 1

a b

ALC Ext. 1

a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

FCA0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

1) Two Emergency Extensions or two Emergency ALC Extensionscan be connected to an ATU-G, it is not possible to have bothsolutions. During normal operation the Emergency Telephonescannot be used. In case of two ALC extensions are used asEmergency Extensions, they also can be used as normalextensions during normal operation.

PERIPHERALCIRCUITBOARD


PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

MC-A/C

(connected toATU with 4 CCTs)

FCB (connections to exchange

lines)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FCD(connections to exchange

lines)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

MC-A/C


FCB (connections to exchange

lines)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

6

a b

7

a b

8

a b

9

a b


lines)

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

4

a b

5

a b

10

a b

11

a b

MC-D/F


FBD (connections to exchange

lines)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b


lines)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

MC-D/F


FBC (connections to

trunk circuit numbers)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

6

a b

7

a b

8

a b

9

a b


lines)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

6

a b

7

a b

8

a b

9

a b

FCC (connections to

trunk circuit numbers)

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

4

a b

5

a b

10

a b

11

a b


lines)

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

4

a b

5

a b

10

a b

11

a b

DTU-CA/PRDTU-PU/PH

FBA(FBB for DTU-PH)

TLI

120 ΩTLI

120 Ω- - - - TLO

120 ΩTLO

120 Ω- - - -

DTU-BA

FBARX0

+ -

RX1

+ -

RX2

+ -

RX3

+ -

TX0

+ -

TX1

+ -

TX2

+ -

TX3

+ -

FBBRX4

+ -

RX5

+ -

RX6

+ -

not

used

TX4

+ -

TX5

+ -

TX6

+ -

not

used

LTU FCDData in

a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

Data out

a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

LDCFBA

do not

connect

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FCC8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

FAA

FAB

FAC

FAD

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

MC / DTU / LDC CONNECTIONS ATMDF BLOCKSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 402 9209

MCE CONNECTIONS AT MDF BLOCKSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 403 9209



PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

MCE-A/C/D/F

(connected toATU with 4 CC Ts)

Max. 16 CCTsper MCE board

FBB (connections to

extensions)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FCB(connections to

extensions)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b


lines)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b


lines)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

MCE-A/C/D/F



FBB (connections to

extensions)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

6

a b

7

a b

8

a b

9

a b

FCB(connections to

extensions)

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

4

a b

5

a b

10

a b

11

a b

FBC (connections to

trunk circuits)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

6

a b

7

a b

8

a b

9

a b

FCC(connections to

trunk circuits)

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

4

a b

5

a b

10

a b

11

a b


lines)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

6

a b

7

a b

8

a b

9

a b


lines)

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

4

a b

5

a b

10

a b

11

a b

MCE-A/C/D/F



FBB (connections to

extensions)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FCB(connections to

extensions)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b


lines)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

not

used

not

used


lines)

6

a b

7

a b

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

not

used

not

used

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

FAA

FAB

FAC

FAD

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

ESU CONNECTIONS AT MDF BLOCKSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 404 9209



PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

ESU

FBA (connection to ALC cir-cuits, via MDF or direct)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FBB (connections to

extensions)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FBC (connections to ATU cir-cuits via MDF or direct)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b


lines)

0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

FCA (connection to ALC cir-cuits, via MDF or direct)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

FCB (connections to

extensions)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

FCC (connections to ATU cir-cuits via MDF or direct)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b


lines)

8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

FAA

FAB

FAC

FAD

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

FAB

FAC

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

PMC, ACC AND KTLC CONNECTIONS AT MDFBLOCKSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 405 9304

a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a
















* If the emergency switch on the ACC is active the emergency telephone is connected to trunk circuit 0 for the first PEC and for thesecond PEC connected to trunk 2. Trunk 1 and trunk 3 do not have a emergency switch over option. The emergency telephone isonly used for emergency purposes.

** Use the description which is applicable.



PERIPHERAL CIRCUIT

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

CCT/

Wires

PMC(with DOC)

connector pos. FAA 0

a b

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

not

used

PMC(with AOC)

FAB(second oper. position)

Teleph.

Ta Tb

Microph.

Ma Mb

Power

-48V gnd

Power

-48V gnd

not

used

Data in

DIa DIb

Data out

DOa DOb

Power

-48V gnd

FAC(first oper. position)

Teleph.

Ta Tb

Microph.

Ma Mb

Power

-48V gnd

Power

-48V gnd

not

used

Data in

DIa DIb

Data out

DOa DOb

Power

-48V gnd

ACC

FCB (Standard 8 extension lines)

line CCT 0

a b

line CCT 1

a b

line CCT 2

a b

line CCT 3

a b

line CCT 4

a b

line CCT 5

a b

line CCT 6

a b

line CCT 7

a b

FAC**(on PEC position 0 and 1a TU, type AS01/M50 orAS01/0B or SS01/0B)

trunk 0

a b

trunk 1

a b

emer. tel.*

a b

not

used

trunk 2

a b

trunk 3

a b

emer. tel.*

a b

not

used

KTLC-8or

KTLC-A

(8 CCTs)

FBA0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

0

c d

1

c d

2

c d

3

c d

FBD4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

4

c d

5

c d

6

c d

7

c d

KTLC-E

(16 CCTs)

FBA0

a b

1

a b

2

a b

3

a b

0

c d

1

c d

2

c d

3

c d

FBD4

a b

5

a b

6

a b

7

a b

4

c d

5

c d

6

c d

7

c d

FAB8

a b

9

a b

10

a b

11

a b

8

c d

9

c d

10

c d

11

c d

FCC12

a b

13

a b

14

a b

15

a b

12

c d

13

c d

14

c d

15

c d

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

FAA

FAB

FAC

FAD

FBA

FBB

FBC

FBD

FCA

FCB

FCC

FCD

See Note2

SeeNote1

Clock to PMC

To MDF

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

DLC / LDC / DTU / LTU CABLINGDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 420.1 9209

DLC-C / DLC-D ( / LDC) connections

*

*

*

*

DLC-C

100

DLC-D

100

To MDF

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

DLC-I

100

To MDF

*

*

DLC-I connections

DTU-BA

100

To MDF

*

*

Clock to PMC

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

To MDF

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

LDC

DLC-D

DLC-C

*

*

*

*

100

100

100

DTU-BA connections

DTU-LTUconnections

Clock to PMC

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

DTU

100

LTU

100

Clock to PMC

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

DTU-CA/PRconnections

DTU

100

Second DTUIf applicable

1 2

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

DTU-PU/PHconnections

DTU

100

*

*

If DTU-PU

To NT1 MultiplexingEquipment (GND, -48 V).DTU-PU and DTU-PHonly.

Second DTUIf applicable

1 2

Note1 : If DTU-PU is used, then the coax front connectorposition is FBA, while the rest of the FB.. frontconnectors are not used.

Note2 : If DTU-PH is used, then connector position is FBB.

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

DTU-CA/PR/PU AND LTU INTERFACECONNECTIONSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 420.2 9209

DTU-PU

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

100

DTU-CA/PR

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

100

Input/output 75Ω or 120 Ω

Input 75Ω*

Output 75Ω*

Input/output 75Ω or 120Ω *

Connector not used

Connector not used

Connector not used

Clock output to PMC(2.048 MHz).

* Either the coax connectors orthe F122 connector are usedfor input and output

GND and -48 V (250 mA)To NT1 multiplexing equipment.For connector layout refer todiagram 420.3.

*

*

*

TLO-data

TLO-shield

Not connected

TLI-data

TLI-shield

Not connected

LTU Alarm signal

LTU Alarm ground

MDF → LTU135Ω

Not connected

LTU → MDF135Ω

Not connected

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

LTU CONNECTOR B (FCD)Not connected

Strap ***

Not connected

TLO-data

TLO-shield

Not connected

Service alarm LTU ground

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

120Ω CABLE CONNECTORS

75Ω CABLE CONNECTIONS

Not connected

*** StrapMaintenance

Alarm LTU signalTLI-data

TLI-shield

LTU Alarm signal

LTU Alarm ground

DTU CONNECTOR FBALTU CONNECTOR A (FCB)

* TLI-120Ω (a)

* TLI-120Ω (b)

Shield incoming

Not connected

* TLI-75Ω (a) **

* TLI-75Ω (b) **

Not connected

Ground

* TLO-120Ω (a)

* TLO-120Ω (b)

Shield outgoing

Not connected

* TLO-75Ω (a) **

* TLO-75Ω (b) **

Not connected

Not connected

* TLI = Trunk Line Incoming from the LTU (inward).

TLO = Trunk Line Outgoing to the LTU (outward).

** = These signals are not present on the LTU with the 12 NC

code : 9562 151 1210.*** = Straps are positioned on DTU-PR only. These straps are

used to connect the cable shields of the incoming andoutgoing cable to ground or to leave the cable shieldsfloating.

*** Straps are positionedon the DTU-PR only

Clock output to PMC (2.048 MHz).

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

TLO

TLO-shield

Not connected

DTU-PH AND LTU INTERFACECONNECTIONSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 420.3 9209

Not connected

TLO-data

TLO-shield

Not connected

Not connected

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

75Ω CABLE CONNECTIONS120Ω CABLE CONNECTORS

TLI

TLI-shield

Not connected

Ground

Not connected

TLI-data

TLI-shield

Not connected

Ground

MDF → LTU135Ω

Not connected

LTU → MDF135Ω

Not connected

1a

1b

2a

2b

3a

3b

4a

4b

5a

5b

6a

6b

7a

7b

8a

8b

LTU CONNECTOR B (FCD)

DTU-PH

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

100

Input 75Ω*

Output 75Ω*

Input/output 75Ω or 120 Ω*

* Either the coax connectors or theF122 connector are used forinput and output.

Clock output to PMC (2.048 MHz).

GND and -48 V (250 mA)To NT1 multiplexing equipment

DTU-PH CONNECTOR FBBLTU CONNECTOR A (FCB)

* TLI-120Ω (a)

* TLI-120Ω (b)

Shield incoming

Not connected

* TLI-75Ω (a) **

* TLI-75Ω (b) **

Not connected

Ground

* TLO-120Ω (a)

* TLO-120Ω (b)

Shield outgoing

Not connected

* TLO-75Ω (a) **

* TLO-75Ω (b) **

Not connected

Not connected

* TLI = Trunk Line Incoming from the LTU (inward).

TLO = Trunk Line Outgoing to the LTU (outward).

** = These signals are not present on the LTU with the 12 NC

code : 9562 151 1210.

DTU-PH CONNECTOR FCD

Ground

-48 V

Ground

-48 V

Ground

-48 V

Ground

-48 V

Ground

-48 V

Ground

-48 V

Ground

-48 V

Ground

-48 V

Connector FCD is connected to NT1multiplexing equipment (-48 V, 250 mA).

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

ATUs (6CCTs) Connections to MC-D/FATUs (4CCTs) Connections to MC-D/F

ATUs (4CCTs) Connections to MC-A/C

To MDF

ATU/MC INTERCONNECTIONSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 421 9209

100

100

ATU

100

ATU

100

ATU

*

MC-A/C

*

100

ATU

ATUs (6CCTs) Connections to MC-A/C

3 2 1

100

100

ATU

100

ATU

100

ATU

*

*

*

MC-A/C

*

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

To MDF

To MDF

4 3 2 1

100

100

ATU

100

ATU

100

ATU

*

MC-D/F

100

ATU

*

*

*

100

100

ATU

100

ATU

100

ATU

*

*

MC-D/F

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

To MDF

*

*

*

**

**

1 2

*

*

ATUs (6CCTs) Connections to MCE-A/C/D/F, 12 CCTs

ATU/MCE INTERCONNECTIONSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 422 9209

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

To MDF

ATUs (4CCTs) Connections to MCE-A/C/D/F

4 3 2 1

100

100

ATU

100

ATU

100

ATU

MCE

100

ATU

To ALC-A (1)Conn. FBCor ALC-E

Conn. FAD

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

ATUs (6CCTs) Connections to MCE-A/C/D/F, 16 CCTs

4 3 2 1

100

100

ATU

100

ATU

100

ATU

*

MCE


Conn. FCA

To MDF


Conn. FCA


Conn. FAD

***

*

*

ATU

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

2 1

100

100

ATU

100

100

ALC-A

MCE

100

ALC-E

100

ALC-A

* : These are split cables.

** : When using two ALC-A with 8 CCTs each,then these connections should be made.

*** : When using one ATU board (6 CCTs), thenthe FCA, FCB, FCC and FCD connectionson the MCE are not used.

Note1 : If MCE-D , diagram only validfor 9562 151 6820 upwards.

To MDF

ALC (Emergency) Extension 0

ALC (Emergency) Extension 1

Emergency Extension 0

Emergency Extension 1

DISCONNECTING BLOCKS MDF

100

ATU-G

ATU-G ESU FUNCTIONS DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 423 9209

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

PCTposition

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

a b a b a b a b

1a 2a 3a 4a1b 2b 3b 4b

Ext0 Ext1

a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7Trunk Circuit numbers

ALC0 ALC1

To ALC

Two Emergency Extensions or two Emergency ALC Extensions canbe connected to an ATU-G, it is not possible to have both solutions.During normal operation the Emergency Telephones cannot be used.In case of two ALC extensions are used as Emergency Extensions,they also can be used as normal extensions during normal operation.

100

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

Exchangelines 9 ... 14

Extensions9 ... 14


Extensions1 ... 6

Extensions9 ... 16



Extensions1 ... 8

ESUExtensionslines 5 ... 8

ESUExtensionslines 1 ... 4

Extensions

8 ... 16

ATUs ( including 8CCTs, 8 ESUs, 8MCs)

Exchange

lines 5 ... 8

Exchange

lines 1 ... 4

ATUs (4CCTs) Connections to ESU

****

**

**

**

1 2

*

*

ATUs (6CCTs) Connections to ESU

ESU/ATU/ALC INTERCONNECTIONSDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 424 9209

4 3 2 1

100

100

ATU

100

ATU

100

ATU

ESU

100

ATU

ATU

2 1

100

100

ATU

100

100

ALC-A

ESU

100

ALC-E

100

ALC-A

* : These are split cables.

** : When using two ALC-A with 8 CCTs each,then these connections should be made.

**

**

1 2

100

ALC-A

100

ALC-E

100

ALC-A

To MDF

ATU

100

ALC-A

100

ALC-E

To

MDF

To

MDF

100

100

IPH-B

IPH-A

FBA

B

C

D

FAA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

PCT Position

Flat cable34 pol

a a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaaa a a

a a aa a a

a a aaaa

aaa aaa

aaa

IPH-A - IPH-B INTERCONNECTIONS DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 425 9209

*

*

*

100

*

Modem 2

Modem 3

Modem 1

114

25 13

MLU

*

MODEM 0

0 1 2 3

a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d

Circuit number* Wiring according

to the table below

WIRE PIN CIRCUIT CIRCUIT NAME ABBREVIATION

1a 22 125 Calling indicator (not used) RI

1b 25 142 Test indicator TI

2a 3 104 Received data RD

2b 18 141 Local loopback -

3a 5 106 Clear to send CTS

3b 15 113 Transmitter signal element timing (DTE) TC

4a 20 108 Connect data set to line / data terminal ready DTR

4b 17 115 Receiver signal element timing RC

5a 2 103 Transmitter data TD

5b 7 102 Ground SG

6a 4 105 Request to send RTS

6b 21 140 Loopback / maintenance test SQD

7a 6 107 Data set ready DSR

7b 23 111 Data signalling rate selector DRS

8a 8 109 Data carrier detect DCD

8b 11 126 Select transmit frequency STF

Modem 1 Modem 2 Modem 3

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

MLU - MODEM - MDF CABLINGDB-A 9150e-35Diagram 430 9209

1a 5a 1a 5a

Modem 1 Modem 2 Modem 3

0 1 2 3

a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d

Circuit number

MLU

100

MLU - MODEM FOR MODEM POOL TO MDF DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 431 9209

*

Modem 2

Modem 3

Modem 1

114

25 13

MODEM 0

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

* Wiring accordingto the table below

WIRE PIN SIGNAL

2a 3 104

2b 18 141

3a 5 106

3b 15 113

4a 20 108

4b 17 115

5a 2 103

5b 7 102

6a 4 105

6b 21 140

7a 6 107

7b 23 111

8a 8 109

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

D

PSU-F connections to ATU-LB

MDF Disconnecting blocks

PSU-F (- ATU-LB) INTERCONNECTIONSDB-A 9150e-35Diagram 436 9209

CHECK CORRECTPOSITIONHIGH SIDE PIN

FAA ÷ FBD

PSU-F

FCC / FCD

ATU-LB12

1a RED

1b BLUE

2a YELLOW

2b GREEN *

PSU-F

190

a a a

a a aa a a

a a a

a a aaaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

aaa

Alarm

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

(X) (X) 2 1

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

DATU

ATU

ATU

ATU

100

PSU-F

100

*

100

*

100

*

100

*

****

*

*

*

* * *

(X) (X) 2 1

FAA

B

C

D

FBA

B

C

D

FCA

B

C

DATU

ATU

ATU

ATU

100

PSU-F

100

*

100

*

100

*

100

*

****

*

*

*

*

*

*

OVERVOLTAGE ARRESTOR AND CARTRIDGE(SOFYCOM) DB-A 9150e-35Diagram 440 9412

METAL EARTH

STRIP

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

a a a a a a

COAXIAL CONNECTOR FOR MDF DB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 450 9412

4.25mm

6.6mm

*

a aa aa a

a aa aa a

a aa aa a

a a a

a a a

a a a

OPERATOR CONNECTION BOXDB-A 9150e-35 Diagram 460 9209

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

308

108

301

101

1a

1b

2a

8b

To analogueoperator position

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

1a 2a 8a1b 2b 8b

NOTE: Cut-off the wires that are not used.

CE30300E

Documents

peripheral software

retrievingispbx software

philips communication

written consent

copyright owner

circuit conditions

contents pages

sophos55255 systems